-3- Learning manual
10318 user/fundamental.itely -- Fundamental concepts
-14581 user/tweaks.itely -- Tweaking output
+14647 user/tweaks.itely -- Tweaking output
3007 user/working.itely -- Working on LilyPond files
483 user/templates.itely -- Templates
-28389 total
+28455 total
-4- Notation reference
695 user/lilypond.tely
91 user/notation.itely -- Musical notation
-3086 user/pitches.itely
+3123 user/pitches.itely
5013 user/rhythms.itely
1146 user/expressive.itely
555 user/repeats.itely
1455 user/simultaneous.itely
1635 user/staff.itely
-906 user/editorial.itely
+895 user/editorial.itely
2286 user/text.itely
76 user/specialist.itely -- Specialist notation
2670 user/vocal.itely
-1333 user/chords.itely
+1398 user/chords.itely
702 user/piano.itely
810 user/percussion.itely
826 user/guitar.itely
4486 user/ancient.itely
5805 user/input.itely -- Input syntax
2164 user/non-music.itely -- Non-musical notation
-8444 user/spacing.itely -- Spacing issues
+8451 user/spacing.itely -- Spacing issues
11291 user/changing-defaults.itely -- Changing defaults
5202 user/programming-interface.itely -- Interfaces for programmers
-1155 user/notation-appendices.itely -- Notation manual tables
+1190 user/notation-appendices.itely -- Notation manual tables
250 user/cheatsheet.itely -- Cheat sheet
-62390 total
+62523 total
-5- Application usage
-3185 user/lilypond-book.itely -- LilyPond-book
+3248 user/lilypond-book.itely -- LilyPond-book
1171 user/converters.itely -- Converting from other formats
-4356 total
+4419 total
-6- Appendices whose translation is optional
310 user/literature.itely
-·<p><i>Zuletzt aktualisiert am·Tue Dec 9 09:40:49 UTC 2008
+·<p><i>Zuletzt aktualisiert am·Sat Dec 20 11:59:00 UTC 2008
</i></p>
<html>
<!-- This page is automatically generated by translation-status.py from
Reinhold Kainhofer</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
- <td><span style="background-color: #2cff20">teilweise</span></td>
+ <td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
<td>vor-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
<td>vor-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>4 Die Ausgabe verändern<br>(14581)</td>
+ <td>4 Die Ausgabe verändern<br>(14647)</td>
<td>Till Rettig</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
Till Rettig</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
- <td><span style="background-color: #2cff20">teilweise</span></td>
+ <td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
<td>vor-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>4 @command{lilypond-book}: Noten in den Text integrieren<br>(3185)</td>
+ <td>4 @command{lilypond-book}: Noten in den Text integrieren<br>(3248)</td>
<td>Reinhold Kainhofer</td>
<td>Till Rettig</td>
<td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
<td>vor-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>1.1 Tonhöhen<br>(3086)</td>
+ <td>1.1 Tonhöhen<br>(3123)</td>
<td>Till Rettig</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
<td>Till Rettig</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
- <td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
+ <td><span style="background-color: #25fe1f">teilweise</span></td>
<td>vor-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>1.7 Anmerkungen<br>(906)</td>
+ <td>1.7 Anmerkungen<br>(895)</td>
<td>Till Rettig</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
<td>Till Rettig</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
- <td><span style="background-color: #25fe1f">teilweise</span></td>
+ <td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
<td>vor-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
<td>vor-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>2.2 Tasteninstrumente und andere Instrumente mit mehreren Systemen<br>(725)</td>
+ <td>2.2 Tasteninstrumente und andere Instrumente mit mehreren Systemen<br>(744)</td>
<td>Till Rettig</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
<td>Till Rettig</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
- <td><span style="background-color: #25fe1f">teilweise</span></td>
+ <td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
<td>vor-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>2.4 Saiteninstrumente mit Bünden<br>(1759)</td>
+ <td>2.4 Saiteninstrumente mit Bünden<br>(1830)</td>
<td>Till Rettig</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
<td>Till Rettig</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
- <td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
+ <td><span style="background-color: #25fe1f">teilweise</span></td>
<td>vor-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
<td>vor-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>2.7 Notation von Akkorden<br>(1333)</td>
+ <td>2.7 Notation von Akkorden<br>(1398)</td>
<td>Till Rettig</td>
<td></td>
- <td><span style="background-color: #dfef77">teilweise (64 %)</span></td>
- <td><span style="background-color: #ff6f57">teilweise</span></td>
+ <td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
+ <td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
<td>vor-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
<td>Till Rettig</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #dfef77">teilweise (79 %)</span></td>
- <td><span style="background-color: #ff6d58">teilweise</span></td>
+ <td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
<td>vor-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
<td>2.9 Weltmusik<br>(1115)</td>
+ <td>Till Rettig</td>
<td></td>
- <td></td>
- <td><span style="background-color: #d0f0f8">nein</span></td>
- <td></td>
+ <td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
+ <td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
<td>vor-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
<td>Till Rettig</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #dfef77">teilweise (5 %)</span></td>
- <td><span style="background-color: #ff8353">teilweise</span></td>
+ <td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
<td>vor-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>4 Abstände<br>(8444)</td>
+ <td>4 Abstände<br>(8451)</td>
<td>Till Rettig</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #dfef77">teilweise (3 %)</span></td>
- <td><span style="background-color: #fff73e">teilweise</span></td>
+ <td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
<td>vor-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
<td>vor-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>B Notationsübersicht<br>(1155)</td>
+ <td>B Notationsübersicht<br>(1190)</td>
<td>Till Rettig</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
- <td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
+ <td><span style="background-color: #25fe1f">teilweise</span></td>
<td>vor-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
<td>Till Rettig</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
- <td><span style="background-color: #33ff21">teilweise</span></td>
+ <td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">ja</span></td>
<td>vor-GDP</td>
</tr>
</table>
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: fr -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: d0614c27e88dc7bd3993f3744a388749ba93b267
+ Translation of GIT committish: 4770e4e71ebff6104cad46bd2d889c3ff6ba3875
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: de -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 4a527608c5ff2ce31e596495d00dce181dc1b9ea
+ Translation of GIT committish: b4a63b6e388283e2f2ac73c3c99da205d209e28a
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@menu
-* Interpretation contexts::
-* Explaining the Internals Reference::
-* Modifying properties::
-* Useful concepts and properties::
-* Common properties::
-* Advanced tweaks::
-* Discussion of specific tweaks::
+* Interpretation contexts::
+* Explaining the Internals Reference::
+* Modifying properties::
+* Useful concepts and properties::
+* Advanced tweaks::
@end menu
@node Interpretation contexts
@menu
-* Contexts explained::
-* Creating contexts::
-* Modifying context plug-ins::
-* Changing context default settings::
-* Defining new contexts::
-* Aligning contexts::
+* Contexts explained::
+* Creating contexts::
+* Modifying context plug-ins::
+* Changing context default settings::
+* Defining new contexts::
+* Aligning contexts::
@end menu
@node Contexts explained
@menu
-* Score - the master of all contexts::
-* Top-level contexts - staff containers::
-* Intermediate-level contexts - staves::
-* Bottom-level contexts - voices::
+* Score - the master of all contexts::
+* Top-level contexts - staff containers::
+* Intermediate-level contexts - staves::
+* Bottom-level contexts - voices::
@end menu
@node Score - the master of all contexts
@menu
-* Navigating the program reference::
-* Layout interfaces::
-* Determining the grob property::
-* Naming conventions::
+* Navigating the program reference::
+* Layout interfaces::
+* Determining the grob property::
+* Naming conventions::
@end menu
@node Navigating the program reference
@menu
-* Overview of modifying properties::
-* The set command::
-* The override command::
-* set versus override::
-* The tweak command::
+* Overview of modifying properties::
+* The set command::
+* The override command::
+* The tweak command::
+* set versus override::
@end menu
@node Overview of modifying properties
@untranslated
-@node set versus override
-@subsection @code{\set} vs. @code{\override}
+@node The tweak command
+@subsection The @code{\tweak} command
@untranslated
-@node The tweak command
-@subsection The @code{\tweak} command
+@node set versus override
+@subsection @code{\set} vs. @code{\override}
@untranslated
@menu
-* Input modes::
-* Direction and placement::
-* Distances and measurements::
-* Spanners::
+* Input modes::
+* Direction and placement::
+* Distances and measurements::
+* Staff symbol properties::
+* Spanners::
+* Visibility of objects::
+* Line styles::
+* Rotating objects::
@end menu
@node Input modes
@untranslated
-@node Spanners
-@subsection Spanners
+@node Staff symbol properties
+@subsection Staff symbol properties
@untranslated
-@node Common properties
-@section Common properties
+@node Spanners
+@subsection Spanners
@untranslated
-@menu
-* Controlling visibility of objects::
-* Line styles::
-* Rotating objects::
-* Aligning objects::
-@end menu
-
-@node Controlling visibility of objects
-@subsection Controlling visibility of objects
+@unnumberedsubsubsec Using the @code{spanner-interface}
+@unnumberedsubsubsec Using the @code{line-spanner-interface}
+@node Visibility of objects
+@subsection Visibility of objects
@untranslated
@menu
-* Removing the stencil::
-* Making objects transparent::
-* Painting objects white::
-* Using break-visibility::
-* Special considerations::
+* Removing the stencil::
+* Making objects transparent::
+* Painting objects white::
+* Using break-visibility::
+* Special considerations::
@end menu
@node Removing the stencil
@untranslated
-@node Aligning objects
-@subsection Aligning objects
+@menu
+* Rotating layout objects::
+* Rotating markup::
+@end menu
+
+@node Rotating layout objects
+@unnumberedsubsubsec Rotating layout objects
+
+@untranslated
+
+
+@node Rotating markup
+@unnumberedsubsubsec Rotating markup
@untranslated
@menu
-* Vertical grouping of grobs::
-* Modifying ends of spanners::
-* Modifying stencils::
-* Modifying shapes::
+* Aligning objects::
+* Vertical grouping of grobs::
+* Modifying stencils::
+* Modifying shapes::
@end menu
-@node Vertical grouping of grobs
-@subsection Vertical grouping of grobs
+@node Aligning objects
+@subsection Aligning objects
@untranslated
-@node Modifying ends of spanners
-@subsection Modifying ends of spanners
+@menu
+* Setting @code{X-offset} and @code{Y-offset} directly::
+* Using the @code{side-position-interface}::
+* Using the @code{self-alignment-interface}::
+* Using the @code{break-aligned-interface}::
+@end menu
+
+@node Setting @code{X-offset} and @code{Y-offset} directly
+@unnumberedsubsubsec Setting @code{X-offset} and @code{Y-offset} directly
@untranslated
-@node Modifying stencils
-@subsection Modifying stencils
+@node Using the @code{side-position-interface}
+@unnumberedsubsubsec Using the @code{side-position-interface}
@untranslated
-@node Modifying shapes
-@subsection Modifying shapes
+@node Using the @code{self-alignment-interface}
+@unnumberedsubsubsec Using the @code{self-alignment-interface}
+
+@untranslated
+
+
+@unnumberedsubsubsec Using the @code{aligned-on-parent} procedures
+@unnumberedsubsubsec Using the @code{centered-on-parent} procedures
+@node Using the @code{break-aligned-interface}
+@unnumberedsubsubsec Using the @code{break-aligned-interface}
+
+@untranslated
+
+
+@node Vertical grouping of grobs
+@subsection Vertical grouping of grobs
@untranslated
-@node Discussion of specific tweaks
-@section Discussion of specific tweaks
+@node Modifying stencils
+@subsection Modifying stencils
+
+@untranslated
+
+
+@node Modifying shapes
+@subsection Modifying shapes
@untranslated
@menu
-* old Contexts explained::
+* Modifying ties and slurs::
@end menu
-@node old Contexts explained
-@subsection old Contexts explained
+@node Modifying ties and slurs
+@unnumberedsubsubsec Modifying ties and slurs
@untranslated
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: b54fc6953a8d70a3c51e8c3d0cbf9b3fe9652d78
+ Translation of GIT committish: 2c00bdbfaf62dd90863331c4713e6b29e32c9322
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@item @code{\new Lyrics}
-@tab Textausgabe
+@tab Gesangtext
@tab
@lilypond[fragment]
\new Lyrics \lyricmode { twinkle }
@end lilypond
@item @code{twin -- kle}
-@tab Text-Trennstrich
+@tab Gesangtext-Trennstrich
@tab
@lilypond[fragment,relative=2]
\set Staff.implicitTimeSignatureVisibility = #all-invisible
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: de -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 19fc0f930f921ca2609e0e60aa26f9d980771b97
+ Translation of GIT committish: 2c00bdbfaf62dd90863331c4713e6b29e32c9322
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@node Chord notation
@section Chord notation
-@untranslated
+@lilypondfile[quote]{chords-headword.ly}
+
+Akkorde können entweder als normale Noten oder im Akkordmodus
+notiert werden; bei letztere Eingabemethode können unterschiedliche
+europäische Akkordbezeichnungsstile eingesetzt werden. Akkordbzeichnungen
+und Generalbass können auch angezeigt werden.
@menu
* Chord mode::
@node Chord mode
@subsection Chord mode
-@untranslated
+@cindex Akkorde
+@cindex chord-Akkorde
+
+Im Akkordmodus (engl. @qq{chord}) werden Akkorde anhand von einem
+Symbol der erwünschten Akkordstruktur notiert, anstatt dass die
+einzelnen Tonhöhen ausgeschrieben werden.
@menu
* Chord mode overview::
* Extended and altered chords::
@end menu
-@c This material comes from 'Entering chord names' --FV
+
@node Chord mode overview
@unnumberedsubsubsec Chord mode overview
@cindex Akkordbezeichnungen
+@cindex Akkordmodus
-LilyPond bringt Unterstützung zur Ausgabe von Akkordsymbolen
-mit. Akkorde können entweder mithilfe der musikalischen
-Akkordeingabe (also @code{< ... >}) notiert werden, aber sie
-können auch mit ihren Bezeichnungen direkt eingegeben werden.
-Programmintern werden die Akkorde als eine Gruppe von Tonhöhen
-dargestellt und können somit transponiert werden.
+Akkorde können als simultane Noten eingegeben werden, wie gezeigt
+in @ref{Chorded notes}.
-@lilypond[quote,ragged-right,verbatim,ragged-right]
-twoWays = \transpose c c' {
- \chordmode {
- c1 f:sus4 bes/f
- }
- <c e g>
- <f bes c'>
- <f bes d'>
-}
+Akkorde können aber auch im Akkordmodus notiert werden. Das ist
+ein Eingabemodus, der sich an Akkordstrukturen traditioneller
+europäischer Musik und nicht an bestimmten einzelnen Tonhöhen
+orientiert. Er bietet sich an, wenn man es gewohnt ist, Akkordsymbole
+zur Beschreibung von Akkorden zu benutzen. Mehr Information zu
+unterschiedlichen Eingabemethoden findet sich in @ref{Input modes}.
+
+@lilypond[verbatim,quote,ragged-right,relative=1]
+\chordmode { c1 g a g c }
+@end lilypond
+
+Akkorde, die im Akkordmodus eingegeben werden, sind musikalische
+Elemente und können genauso wie Akkorde im Notenmodus
+transponiert werden.
+
+Akkordmodus und Notenmodus können gemischt verwendet werden:
+
+@lilypond[verbatim,quote,ragged-right,relative=1]
+<c e g>2 <g b d>
+\chordmode { c2 f }
+<c e g>2 <g' b d>
+\chordmode { f2 g }
+@end lilypond
+
+@seealso
+Glossar:
+@rglos{chord}.
+
+Notationsreferenz:
+@ref{Chorded notes},
+@ref{Input modes}.
+
+Schnipsel:
+@rlsr{Chords}
+
+
+@knownissues
+
+Wenn Akkord- und Notenmodus in linearer Musik abwechseln eingesetzt
+werden und der Akkordmodus am Anfang steht, erstellt der
+Notenmodus ein neues Notensyste:
-<< \new ChordNames \twoWays
- \new Voice \twoWays >>
+@lilypond[verbatim,quote,ragged-right,relative=1]
+\chordmode { c2 f }
+<c e g>2 <g' b d>
@end lilypond
-Dieses Beispiel zeigt auch, dass die Ausgaberoutinen für die
-Akkordsymbole nicht besonders klug sind. Der letzte Akkord
-(@code{f bes d}) wird nicht als Umkehrung erkannt.
+@noindent
+Um dieses Verhalten zu verhindert, muss der @code{Staff}-Kontext
+explizit aufgerufen werden:
-Achtung: Die Dauer eines Akkordes muss außerhalb der
-spitzen Klammern @code{<>} notiert werden.
+@lilypond[verbatim,quote,ragged-right,relative=1]
+\new Staff {
+ \chordmode { c2 f }
+ <c e g>2 <g' b d>
+}
+@end lilypond
-@example
-<c e g>2
-@end example
-@c This material comes from 'Chords mode' --FV
@node Common chords
@unnumberedsubsubsec Common chords
-@cindex Akkord-Modus
+@cindex Dreiklänge
+@cindex Septakkorde
+@cindex Grundton eines Akkords
+@cindex Akkordeigenschaften
+@cindex Umkehrungen
+@cindex Modifikatoren, Akkorde
+@cindex Modi, in Akkorden
+@cindex Akkordmodi
-Im Akkord-Modus wird eine Anzahl von Tonhöhen (ein Akkord)
-durch eine normale Notenbezeichnung notiert. Ein Akkord wird
-mit seinem Grundton notiert, der einfach wie eine normale
-Note geschrieben wird:
+Ein Dreiklang wird
+mit seinem Grundton mit einer möglichen Dauer dahinter notiert:
-@lilypond[quote,ragged-right,fragment,verbatim]
-\chordmode { es4. d8 c2 }
+@lilypond[verbatim,quote,relative=1,ragged-right]
+\chordmode { c2 f4 g }
@end lilypond
@noindent
-Dieser Modus wird mit dem @code{\chordmode}-Befehl aktiviert.
+Moll- übermäßige und verminderte Dreiklänge werden notiert, indem
+@code{:} und ein Modifikator hinter der Dauer angegeben wird:
-@cindex Akkord-Notation
-@cindex Eingabe von Akkorden
+@lilypond[verbatim,quote,ragged-right,relative=1]
+\chordmode { c2:m f4:aug g:dim }
+@end lilypond
-Andere als die Grundakkorde können notiert werden, indem an
-die Notenbezeichnung ein Doppelpunkt und eine Spezifizierung
-(die auch aus einer Zahl bestehen kann) angefügt wird.
+Septakkorde können erstellt werden:
-@lilypond[quote,fragment,verbatim]
-\chordmode { e1:m e1:7 e1:m7 }
+@lilypond[quote,ragged-right,fragment,verbatim,relative=1]
+\chordmode { c1:7 c:m7 c:maj7 c:dim7 c:aug7 }
@end lilypond
-@noindent
-Die erste Zahl, die auf den Grundton folgt, wird als @qq{Art}
+@funindex aug
+@funindex dim
+@funindex maj
+@funindex m
+
+Diese Tabelle zeigt die Funktion der Modifikatoren von Dreiklängen
+und Septakkorden. Eine vollständigere Tabelle findet sich in
+@ref{Common chord modifiers}.
+
+@c @table @code
+@multitable @columnfractions .2 .4 .3
+
+@item
+@b{Modifikator}
+@tab
+@b{Funktion}
+@tab
+@b{Beispiel}
+
+@item
+Kein
+@tab
+Standard: erzeugt einen Durdreiklang.
+@tab
+@lilypond[line-width=4\cm, noragged-right]
+\chordmode {
+ \override Staff.TimeSignature #'stencil = ##f
+ c1
+}
+@end lilypond
+
+@item
+m, m7
+@tab
+Mollakkord: Dieser Modifikator erniedrigt die dritte und (wenn
+vorhanden) die siebte Stufe.
+@tab
+@lilypond[line-width=4\cm, noragged-right]
+\chordmode {
+ \override Staff.TimeSignature #'stencil = ##f
+ c1:m c:m7
+}
+@end lilypond
+
+
+@item
+dim, dim7
+@tab
+Verminderter Akkord: Dieser Modifikator erniedrigt die dritte, fünfte
+und (wenn vorhanden) die siebte Stufe.
+@tab
+@lilypond[line-width=4\cm, noragged-right]
+\chordmode {
+ \override Staff.TimeSignature #'stencil = ##f
+ c1:dim c:dim7
+}
+@end lilypond
+
+@item
+aug
+@tab
+Übermäßiger Akkord: Dieser Modifikator erhöht die fünfte Stufe.
+@tab
+@lilypond[line-width=4\cm, noragged-right]
+\chordmode {
+ \override Staff.TimeSignature #'stencil = ##f
+ c1:aug
+}
+@end lilypond
+
+@item
+maj, maj7
+@tab
+Großer Septakkord: Dieser Modifikator fügt eine erhöhte siebe
+Stufe hinzu. @code{7} nach dem @code{maj} ist optional. NICHT
+benutzen, um einen Durdreiklang zu notieren.
+@tab
+@lilypond[line-width=4\cm, noragged-right]
+\chordmode {
+ \override Staff.TimeSignature #'stencil = ##f
+ c1:maj c:maj7
+}
+@end lilypond
+
+@end multitable
+
+@seealso
+Notationsreferenz:
+@ref{Common chord modifiers}.
+
+Schnipsel:
+@rlsr{Chords}.
+
+
+@node Extended and altered chords
+@unnumberedsubsubsec Extended and altered chords
+
+@cindex erweiterte Akkorde
+@cindex veränderte Akkorde
+
+Akkordstrukturen können im Akkordmodus beliebig komplex konstruiert
+werden. Die Modifikatoren können benutzt werden, um den Akkord zu
+erweitern, bestimmte Stufen hinzuzufügen oder zu entfernen, Stufen
+zu erhöhen oder zu erniedrigen und Bassnoten hinzuzufügen bzw.
+Umgkehrungen zu erzeugen.
+
+Die erste Zahl, die auf den Doppelpunkt folgt, wird als @qq{Bereich}
des Akkordes interpretiert: Terzen werden auf dem Grundton
-gestapelt, bis die angegebene Zahl (=Tonhöhe) erreicht ist.
-Eine Ausnahme ist @code{c:13}, weil hier die 11 ausgelassen wird.
+gestapelt, bis die angegebene Zahl (=Tonstufe) erreicht ist. Wenn
+der Bereich keine Terz ist (also etwa 6), dann werden Terzen bis
+zur höchst möglichen Terz unter dem Bereich gestapelt, und der
+Endton des Bereichs wird hinzugefügt. Der größtmögliche Wert ist
+13. Jeder größere Werte wird als 13 interpretiert.
+
+@lilypond[quote,ragged-right,fragment,verbatim,relative=1]
+\chordmode {
+ c1:2 c:3 c:4 c:5
+ c1:6 c:7 c:8 c:9
+ c1:10 c:11 c:12 c:13
+ c1:14
+}
+@end lilypond
-@lilypond[quote,fragment,verbatim]
-\chordmode { c:3 c:5 c:6 c:7 c:8 c:9 c:10 c:11 c:13 }
+@noindent
+Sowhohl @code{c:5} als auch @code{c} erzeugen einen D-Dur-Dreiklang.
+
+Da eine unveränderte 11 nicht gut klingt, wenn sie mit einer
+unveränderten 13 zusammenklingt, wird die 11 von einem @code{:13}-Akkord
+entfernt (es sei denn sie wird explizit verlangt).
+
+@lilypond[quote,ragged-right,fragment,verbatim,relative=1]
+\chordmode {
+ c1:13 c:13.11 c:m13
+}
@end lilypond
@cindex Grundton eines Akkordes
Kompliziertere Akkorde können auch konstruiert werden, indem
einzelne Intervalle zu dem Grundton addiert werden.
-Diese Additionen werden nach der ersten Zahl notiert und mit
+Diese Additionen werden nach dem Bereich notiert und mit
Punkten voneinander getrennt.
-@lilypond[quote,verbatim,fragment]
-\chordmode { c:5.6 c:3.7.8 c:3.6.13 }
+@lilypond[quote,verbatim,fragment,relative=1]
+\chordmode {
+ c1:5.6 c:3.7.8 c:3.6.13
+}
@end lilypond
@noindent
-Einzelne Intervalle können mit @code{-} oder @code{+} vergrößert
-oder verkleinert werden.
+Hinzugefügte Stufen können beliebig groß sein:
-@lilypond[quote,verbatim,fragment]
-\chordmode { c:7+ c:5+.3- c:3-.5-.7- }
+@lilypond[quote,verbatim,fragment,relative=1]
+\chordmode {
+ c4:5.15 c:5.20 c:5.25 c:5.30
+}
@end lilypond
-@noindent
-Zu entfernende Töne werden mit der gleichen Methode notiert,
-allerdings mit einem Dach (@code{^}) vor der Sequenz, die
-nicht erscheinen soll. Sie müssen nach den zu addierenden
-Tönen notiert werden.
+@cindex Akkordstufen, Veränderung
+@cindex Akkordstufen, Alteration
-@lilypond[quote,verbatim,fragment]
-\chordmode { c^3 c:7^5 c:9^3.5 }
+Einzelne Stufen können mit @code{-} oder @code{+} vergrößert
+oder verkleinert werden. Um eine Stufe zu verändert, die automatisch
+in den Akkord aufgenommen wurde, kann sie in veränderter Form
+nach dem Bereich hinzugefügt werden.
+
+@lilypond[quote,verbatim,fragment,relative=1]
+\chordmode {
+ c1:7+ c:5+.3- c:3-.5-.7-
+}
@end lilypond
-Mit weiteren Endungen können Tonhöhen der Akkorde beeinflusst werden.
-Folgende Endungen sind unterstützt:
+@cindex Entfernen von Stufen in Akkorden
+@cindex Akkorde, Entfernen von Tönen
-@table @code
-@item m
-Der Moll-Akkord. Diese Endung erniedrigt die Terz (3) und die Septime (7),
-wenn vorhanden.
-
-@item dim
-Der verminderte Akkord. Diese Endung erniedrigt die Terz (3), Quinte (5)
-und Septime (7), wenn vorhanden.
-
-@item aug
-Der übermäßige Akkord. Diese Endung erhöht die Quinte (5).
-
-@item maj
-Der große Sept-Akkord. Diese Endung erhöht die Septime (7),
-wenn vorhanden.
-
-@item sus
-Der Sekundakkord. Diese Endung entfernt die Terz (3) aus dem
-Akkord. Schreiben Sie @code{2} oder @code{4} hinter die Endung,
-um entweder die Sekunde (2) oder die Quarte (4) zum Akkord
-hinzuzufügen.
-@end table
+@funindex ^
-Die Endungen können mit weiteren hinzugefügten Tönen kombiniert
-werden.
-@lilypond[quote,verbatim,fragment]
- \chordmode { c:sus4 c:7sus4 c:dim7 c:m6 }
+Zu entfernende Töne werden mit der gleichen Methode notiert,
+allerdings mit einem Dach (@code{^}) vor der Sequenz, die
+nicht erscheinen soll. Sie müssen nach den zu addierenden
+Tönen notiert werden. Die einzelnen zu entfernenden Töne werden
+mit Punkten getrennt.
+
+@lilypond[quote,verbatim,fragment,relative=1]
+\chordmode {
+ c1^3 c:7^5 c:9^3 c:9^3.5 c:13.11^3.7
+}
@end lilypond
-@cindex Modi, in Akkorden
-@cindex Akkordmodi
-@funindex aug
-@funindex dim
-@funindex maj
@funindex sus
-@funindex m
-Da der unveränderte elfte Ton in Verbindung mit einem unveränderten
-13. Ton nicht gut klingt, wird die 11 in diesem Fall automatisch
-entfernt (es sei denn, sie wird explizit gefordert).
+Sekund- und Quartakkorde können mit dem Modifikator @code{sus}
+notiert werden. Hiermit wird die dritte Stufe aus dem Akkord
+entfernt. Mit einer anschließenden @code{2} wird die zweite, mit
+einer @code{4} die vierte Stufe hinzugefügt. @code{sus} entspricht
+@code{^3} und @code{sus4} ist gleich @code{.4^3}.
@lilypond[quote,ragged-right,fragment,verbatim]
-\chordmode { c:13 c:13.11 c:m13 }
+\chordmode {
+ c1:sus c:sus2 c:sus4 c:5.4^3
+}
@end lilypond
+@cindex Umgekehrungen
+@cindex Bassnote in Akkorden
+
@funindex /
Eine Umkehrung (ein Ton des Akkordes wird unter den Grundton gesetzt)
-sowie auch Bassnoten können mit dem Schrägstrich (@code{/}) markiert
+sowie auch zusätzliche Bassnoten können mit dem Schrägstrich (@code{/}) markiert
werden:
-@lilypond[quote,ragged-right,fragment,verbatim]
-\chordmode { c1 c/g c/f }
+@lilypond[quote,ragged-right,fragment,verbatim, relative=2]
+\chordmode {
+ c1 c/g c/f
+}
@end lilypond
+
@funindex /+
-Eine Bassnote kann hinzugefügt werden, anstatt dass sie aus dem Akkord
-entnommen wird, indem noch ein Plus zwischen den Schrägstrich und
-die Tonhöhe gesetzt wird:
+Eine Bassnote, die zum Akkord hinzugehört, kann hinzugefügt werden,
+anstatt dass sie aus dem Akkord entnommen wird, indem noch ein
+Plus zwischen den Schrägstrich und die Tonhöhe gesetzt wird:
@lilypond[quote,ragged-right,fragment,verbatim]
-\chordmode { c1 c/+g c/+f }
+\chordmode {
+ c1 c/g c/+g
+}
@end lilypond
-Der Akkord-Modus funktioniert ähnlich wie der Liedtext-Modus
-(@code{\lyricmode}) usw. Die meisten Befehle funktionieren weiter,
-so können etwa @code{r} und @code{\skip} benutzt werden,
-um Pausen und Zwischenräume einzufügen. Mit Eigenschaftsbefehlen
-können verschiedene Einstellungen verändert werden.
+Akkordmodifikatoren, die benutzt werden können, um eine große
+Anzahl an Standardakkorden zu erzeugen, werden gezeigt in
+@ref{Common chord modifiers}.
+
+@seealso
+Notationsreferenz:
+@ref{Common chord modifiers}.
+
+Schnipsel:
+@rlsr{Chords}
@knownissues
-Jedes Intervall kann nur einmal in einem Akkord vorkommen.
-Im folgenden Beispiel wird nur der erweiterte Akkord erstellt,
-weil @code{5+} als letztes kommt.
+Jede Stufe kann nur einmal in einem Akkord vorkommen.
+Im folgenden Beispiel wird ein erweiterter Akkord erstellt,
+weil @code{5+} zuletzt gelesen wird.
@cindex Cluster
@lilypond[quote,ragged-right,verbatim,fragment]
-\chordmode { c:5.5-.5+ }
+\chordmode {
+ c:5.5-.5+
+}
@end lilypond
-@node Extended and altered chords
-@unnumberedsubsubsec Extended and altered chords
+Nur die zweite Umkehrung kann erstellt werden, indem eine
+Bassnote hinzugefügt wird. Die erste Umkehrung erfordert, dass
+der Grundton des Akkordes geändert wird.
+
+@lilypond[quote,ragged-right,verbatim,fragment]
+\chordmode {
+ c'1: c':/g e:6-3-^5 e:m6-^5
+}
+@end lilypond
-@untranslated
@node Displaying chords
@subsection Displaying chords
-@untranslated
+Akkorde können zusätzlich zur üblichen Notation als Töne auf
+einem Notensystem auch mit einem Akkordsymbol gesetzt werden.
@menu
* Printing chord names::
@node Printing chord names
@unnumberedsubsubsec Printing chord names
+@funindex ChordNames
+
@cindex Akkordsymbole
+@cindex Akkordbezeichnungen
@cindex Ausgabe von Akkordbezeichnungen
-@cindex Akkorde
@cindex Symbole, Akkord-
-Um Akkordsymbole anstelle der Noten zu setzen, muss der
-@rinternals{ChordNames}-Kontext. Die Akkorde können entweder
-mit der Notation aus dem vorigen Abschnitt oder direkt
-mit der Akkordeingabe für Noten (@code{<} und @code{>})
-notiert werden.
+Akkordsymbole anstelle der Noten werde im @code{ChordNames}-Kontext
+notiert.
-@lilypond[quote,verbatim,ragged-right]
-harmonies = {
- \chordmode {a1 b c} <d' f' a'> <e' g' b'>
+@lilypond[verbatim,quote,relative=1,ragged-right]
+\new ChordNames {
+ \chordmode {
+ c2 f4. g8
+ }
}
-<<
- \new ChordNames \harmonies
- \new Staff \harmonies
->>
@end lilypond
-Sie können Akkordwiederholungen unterdrücken, so dass nur
-bei einer Änderung des Akkordes ein Symbol ausgegeben wird.
-Das aktuelle Symbol wird auch am Zeilenanfang wiederholt.
-Das geschieht mit dem Befehl @code{\set chordChanges = ##t}.
+Die Akkorde können entweder als simultane Noten oder unter Einsatz
+des Akkordmodus (@code{chordmode}) notiert werden. Der angezeigte
+Akkord ist der gleiche, es sei denn, Umgkehrungen oder zusätzliche
+Basstöne werden notiert:
-@lilypond[quote,verbatim,ragged-right]
-harmonies = \chordmode {
- c1:m c:m \break c:m c:m d
-}
+@lilypond[verbatim,quote,relative=1]
<<
\new ChordNames {
- \set chordChanges = ##t
- \harmonies }
- \new Staff \transpose c c' \harmonies
+ <c e g>2 <f bes c>
+ <f c' e g>1
+ \chordmode {
+ c2 f:sus4 c1:/f
+ }
+ }
+ {
+ <c e g>2 <f bes c>
+ <f, c' e g>1
+ \chordmode {
+ c2 f:sus4 c1:/f
+ }
+ }
>>
@end lilypond
-In den vorangegangenen Beispielen wurden alle Akkorde über dem
-Notensystem mit den entsprechenden Noten ausgegeben. Das ist aber
-nicht erforderlich. Akkorde können auch alleine gedruckt werden.
-Dabei kann es nötig sein, @rinternals{Volta_engraver} und
-@rinternals{Bar_engraver} einzufügen, damit Wiederholungen
-angezeigt werden.
+@funindex{\chords}
-@lilypond[ragged-right,verbatim]
-\new ChordNames \with {
- \override BarLine #'bar-size = #4
- \consists Bar_engraver
- \consists "Volta_engraver"
-}
-\chordmode { \repeat volta 2 {
- f1:maj7 f:7 bes:7
- c:maj7
-} \alternative {
- es e
+@code{\chords @{ ... @}} ist eine Kurznotation für die Bezeichnung
+@code{\new ChordNames @{ \chordmode @{ ... @} @}}.
+
+@lilypond[verbatim,quote,ragged-right, relative=1]
+\chords {
+ c2 f4.:m g8:maj7
}
+@end lilypond
+
+@lilypond[verbatim,quote,ragged-right, relative=1]
+\new ChordNames {
+ \chordmode {
+ c2 f4.:m g8:maj7
+ }
}
@end lilypond
+@snippets
+
+@lilypondfile[verbatim,lilyquote,ragged-right,texidoc,doctitle]
+{showing-chords-at-changes.ly}
+
+@c @lilypondfile[verbatim,lilyquote,ragged-right,texidoc,doctitle]
+@c {adding-bar-lines-to-chordnames-context.ly}
+
+@lilypondfile[verbatim,lilyquote,ragged-right,texidoc,doctitle]
+{simple-lead-sheet.ly}
+
+
+@seealso
+Glossar:
+@rglos{chord}.
+
+Notationsreferenz:
+@ref{Writing music in parallel}.
+
+Schnipsel:
+@rlsr{Chords}.
+
+Referenz der Interna:
+@rinternals{ChordNames},
+@rinternals{ChordName},
+@rinternals{Chord_name_engraver},
+@rinternals{Volta_engraver},
+@rinternals{Bar_engraver}.
+
+@knownissues
+
+Akkorde, die Umkehrungen oder zusätzliche Basstöne beinhalten,
+werden nicht richtig bezeichnet, wenn sie im Notenmodus notiert
+werden.
+
+
+
+@node Customizing chord names
+@unnumberedsubsubsec Customizing chord names
+
+@cindex Anpassen von Akkordsymbolen
+@cindex Akkordsymbole, anpassen
+
+Es gibt kein allein gültiges System zur Benennung von Akkorden.
+Unterschiedliche Musiktraditionen benutzen unterschiedliche Bezeichnungen
+für die gleichen Akkorde. Es gibt zusätzlich auch unterschiedliche
+Symbole, die für den gleichen Akkord angezeigt werden können. Die
+Bezeichnungen und dargestellten Symbole können angepasst werden.
+
Die Standardeinstellungen für die Symbole entsprechen den Konventionen
im Jazz, wie sie von Klaus Ignatzek (siehe @ref{Literature list}).
-vorgeschlagen wurden. Mit den folgenden Befehlen könne aber
-Anpassungen vorgenommen werden:
+vorgeschlagen wurden. Das Benennungssystem für die Akkorde kann
+verändert werden, wie weiter unten gezeigt wird. Ein alternatives
+Notationssystem für Jazzakkorde ist auch erhältlich. Die
+Ignatzek und die alternative Jazznotation finden sich in der Tabelle in
+@ref{Chord name chart}.
+
+@c TODO -- Change this so we don't have a non-verbatim example.
+@c Make short example in docs, then move longer example to
+@c appendix, where the length of the snippet won't matter.
+
+Zusätzlich zu den unterschiedlichen Bezeichnungssystemen werden
+unterschiedliche Notenbezeichnungen für die Grundtöne.
+Die vordefinierten Befehle @code{\germanChords},
+@code{\semiGermanChords}, @code{\italianChords} und @code{\frenchChords}
+setzen diese Variablen. Die Auswirkungen werden im nächsten Beispiel
+gezeigt.
+
+@lilypondfile[ragged-right]{chord-names-languages.ly}
+
+Wenn keine der definierten Einstellungen zum gewünschten Ergebnis
+führt, kann die Anzeige des Akkordsymbols durch die folgenden
+Eigenschaften verändert werden:
@table @code
-@funindex chordNameExceptions
-@item chordNameExceptions
-Das ist eine Liste, die alle Akkorde aufführt, die ungewöhnliche
-Form haben.
-Die Liste muss nach dem Schema
-@example
-@{ <c f g bes>1 \markup @{ \super "7" "wahh" @} @}
-@end example
-@noindent
-gesetzt werden.
-
-Diese Liste in die @code{chordNameExceptions}-Funktion einzulesen
-ist allerdings etwas kompliziert. Mit dem folgenden Code-Abschnitt
-wird @code{chExceptionMusic} (aufeinander folgende
-Noten) in eine Ausnahmeliste umgewandelt:
-@example
-(sequential-music-to-chord-exceptions chExceptionMusic #t)
-@end example
-Dann werden mit dem Code
-@example
-(append
- (sequential-music-to-chord-exceptions chExceptionMusic #t)
- ignatzekExceptions)
-@end example
-die neuen Ausnahmen zu den schon vorhandenen hinzugefügt, die in
-der Datei @file{ly/@/chord@/-modifier@/-init@/.ly} definiert sind.
-
-@c Ein Beispiel für die Benutzung dieser Eigenschaft findet sich
-@c auch in der Datei @lsr{chords,chord@/-name@/-exceptions@/.ly}.
-@lilypondfile[verbatim,lilyquote,ragged-right,texidoc,doctitle]
-{chord-name-exceptions.ly}
+@funindex chordRootNamer
-@cindex Ausnahmen, Akkordsymbole
+@item chordRootNamer
+
+Das Akkordsymbol wird normalerweise als Buchstabe des Grundtons mit
+optionaler Alteration dargestellt. Die Interpretation
+einer Tonhöhe als Buchstabe wird von der @code{chordRootNamer}-Funktion
+übernommen. Besondere Bezeichnungen, wie etwa im Deutschen H für
+einen H-Dur-Akkord (und nicht @qq{B} wie im Englischen), können
+durch Hinzufügen einer neuen Funktion zu dieser Eigenschaft
+erstellt werden.
@funindex majorSevenSymbol
+
@item majorSevenSymbol
+
Mit dieser Eigenschaft wird das Aussehen der Notation für die
-große Septime (7) bestimmt. Vordefiniert sind die Optionen
+große Septime (7) bestimmt. Vordefiniert sind die Optionen
@code{whiteTriangleMarkup} und @code{blackTriangleMarkup}.
-@c Siehe auch
-@c @lsr{chords,chord@/-name@/-major7@/.ly} für ein Beispiel.
+
+@funindex chordNoteNamer
+
+@item chordNoteNamer
+
+Wenn das Akkordsymbol zusätzliche Tonhöhen enthält, die nicht den
+Grundton darstellen (etwa eine zusätzliche Bassnote), wird diese
+Funktion eingesetzt, um die zusätzliche Tonhöhe auszugeben.
+In den Standardeinstellungen wird die Tonhöhe mit der
+@code{chordRootNamer}-Funktion gesetzt. Die
+@code{chordNoteNamer}-Eigenschaft hingegen kann dieses Verhalten
+verändern und etwa den Basston etwa als Kleinbuchstaben darstellen.
@funindex chordNameSeparator
+
@item chordNameSeparator
+
Verschiedene Teile eines Akkordsymboles werden normalerweise
durch einen Schrägstrich markiert. Indem @code{chordNameSeparator}
-ein anderer Wert zugewiesen wird, kann das Aussehen des Trenners
-verändert werden, z. B.:
-@lilypond[quote,ragged-right,fragment,verbatim]
-\new ChordNames \chordmode {
- c:7sus4
- \set chordNameSeparator
- = \markup { \typewriter "|" }
- c:7sus4
-}
-@end lilypond
+ein anderer Wert zugewiesen wird, kann ein beliebiges Zeichen für
+den Trenner benutzt werden.
-@funindex chordRootNamer
-@item chordRootNamer
-Der Grundton eines Akkordes wird normalerweise als Buchstabe mit
-optionaler Erhöhung oder Erniedrigung dargestellt. Die Interpretation
-einer Tonhöhe als Buchstabe wird von der @code{chordRootNamer}-Eigenschaft
-übernommen. Besondere Bezeichnungen, wie etwa im Deutschen H für
-einen H-Dur-Akkord (und nicht @qq{B} wie im Englischen), können
-durch Hinzufügen einer neuen Funktion zu dieser Eigenschaft
-erstellt werden.
+@funindex chordNameExceptions
-@funindex chordNoteNamer
-@item chordNoteNamer
-In den Standardeinstellungen wird ein einziger Buchstabe für einen
-Akkord ausgegeben, nämlich sein Grundton, der von der
-@code{chordRootNamer}-Eigenschaft bestimmt wird. Die
-@code{chordNoteNamer}-Eigenschaft hingegen kann das Aussehen dieses
-Buchstaben ändern, ihn etwa als Klein- und nicht als Großbuchstabe
-darstellen.
+@item chordNameExceptions
+
+Diese Funktion ist eine Liste mit Paaren. Das erste Objekt eines
+Paares ist eine Anzahl von Tonhöhen, die die Stufen eines Akkordes
+definieren. Das zweite Objekt ist eine Beschriftung, die nach
+@code{chordRootNamer} ausgegeben wird, um das Akkordsymbol zu
+erstellen.
@funindex chordPrefixSpacer
+
@item chordPrefixSpacer
+
Das @qq{m} für Moll-Akkorde wird normalerweise direkt hinter dem
Akkordbuchstaben gesetzt. Mit der Eigenschaft @code{chordPrefixSpacer}
kann ein Abstand(halter) zwischen den Buchstaben und das @qq{m}
@end table
-Die vordefinierten Befehle @code{\germanChords},
-@code{\semiGermanChords}, @code{\italianChords} und @code{\frenchChords}
-benutzen diese Variablen. Die Auswirkungen werden im nächsten Beispiel
-gezeigt.
-
-@lilypondfile[ragged-right]{chord-names-languages.ly}
-
-Zusätzlich sind zwei weitere Vorlagen: eine alternative Jazz-Notation
-und eine systematische Notation, genannt Banter-Akkorde. Die
-alternative Jazz-Notation findet sich auch in der Liste im
-Abschnitt @ref{Chord name chart}.
-
-@c Wie diese Stile verwendet werden,
-@c wird in der Datei
-@c @lsr{chords,chord-names-jazz.ly} gezeigt.
-
-@cindex Banter
-@cindex Jazz-Akkorde
-@cindex Akkorde, Jazz
-
-
@predefined
+@funindex major seven symbols
+@code{\whiteTriangleMarkup},
+@code{\blackTriangleMarkup},
@funindex \germanChords
@code{\germanChords},
@funindex \semiGermanChords
-@code{\semiGermanChords}.
+@code{\semiGermanChords},
@funindex \italianChords
-@code{\italianChords}.
+@code{\italianChords},
@funindex \frenchChords
@code{\frenchChords}.
@endpredefined
+@snippets
+
+@cindex Ausnahmen, Akkordsymbole
+@lilypondfile[verbatim,lilyquote,texidoc,doctitle]
+{chord-name-exceptions.ly}
+
+@c TODO - tweak snippet to use \blackTriangleMarkup as well
+@lilypondfile[verbatim,lilyquote,texidoc,doctitle]
+{chord-name-major7.ly}
+
+@lilypondfile[verbatim,lilyquote,texidoc,doctitle]
+{adding-bar-lines-to-chordnames-context.ly}
+
+@lilypondfile[verbatim,lilyquote,texidoc,doctitle]
+{volta-below-chords.ly}
+
+@lilypondfile[verbatim,lilyquote,texidoc,doctitle]
+{changing-chord-separator.ly}
+
@seealso
-Beispiele:
-@rlsr{Chords}.
+Notationsreferenz:
+@ref{Chord name chart},
+@ref{Common chord modifiers}.
-Init-Dateien: @file{scm/@/chords@/-ignatzek@/.scm} und
-@file{scm/@/chord@/-entry@/.scm}.
+Installierte Dateien:
+@file{scm/@/chords@/-ignatzek@/.scm},
+@file{scm/@/chord@/-entry@/.scm},
+@file{ly/@/chord@/-modifier@/-init@/.ly}.
+Schnipsel:
+@rlsr{Chords}.
+
+@c Internals Reference:
+@c @r internals{}.
@knownissues
-Akkordsymbole werden nur von den Tonhöhenbezeichnungen bestimmt.
-Akkordumkehrungen sind nicht definiert, noch werden Bassnoten
-hinzugefügt. Deshalb kann es zu seltsamen Akkord-Symbolen kommen,
-wenn die Akkorde mit der @code{< ... >} Syntax notiert werden.
+Akkordsymbole werden von den Tonhöhenbezeichnungen innerhalb des
+Akkordes und der Information über die Akkordstruktur, die innerhalb
+von @code{\chordmode} notiert wurde, bestimmt. Wenn der direkte
+Notenmodus benutzt wird, stammen unerwünschte Bezeichnungen daher,
+dass Umgkehrungen und zustätzliche Bassnoten nicht richtig
+interpretiert werden.
+
+@lilypond[quote,ragged-right,verbatim]
+myChords = \relative c' {
+ \chordmode { c1 c/g c/f }
+ <c e g>1 <g c e> <f c' e g>
+}
+<<
+ \new ChordNames { \myChords }
+ \new Staff { \myChords }
+>>
+@end lilypond
+
-@node Customizing chord names
-@unnumberedsubsubsec Customizing chord names
-@untranslated
@node Figured bass
@subsection Figured bass
-@untranslated
+@lilypondfile[quote]{figured-bass-headword.ly}
+
+Generalbassnotation kann dargestellt werden.
@menu
* Introduction to figured bass::
* Displaying figured bass::
@end menu
-@c This material comes from 'Figured bass', needs redistribution by translator --FV
+
@node Introduction to figured bass
@unnumberedsubsubsec Introduction to figured bass
@cindex Basso continuo
@cindex Generalbass
@cindex Bezifferter Bass
+@cindex Continuo, Generalbass
@c TODO: musicological blurb about FB
-LilyPond stellt Unterstützung für Generalbassnotation zur Verfügung.
+LilyPond stellt Unterstützung für Generalbassnotation, auch als
+Basso Continuo bezeichnet, zur Verfügung.
@lilypond[quote,ragged-right,verbatim,fragment]
<<
\new Voice { \clef bass dis4 c d ais g fis}
- \new FiguredBass \figuremode {
- < 6 >4 < 7\+ >8 < 6+ [_!] >
- < 6 >4 <6 5 [3+] >
- < _ >4 < 6 5/>4
+ \new FiguredBass {
+ \figuremode {
+ < 6 >4 < 7\+ >8 < 6+ [_!] >
+ < 6 >4 <6 5 [3+] >
+ < _ >4 < 6 5/>4
+ }
}
>>
@end lilypond
-Die Unterstützung besteht aus zwei Teilen: Es gibt einen Eingabe-Modus,
-aktiviert durch den Befehl @code{\figuremode}, in dem Ziffern für den Bass
-als Nummern eingegeben werden können, und einen Kontext
- @rinternals{FiguredBass}, der dafür sorgt, dass die entsprechenden
- @rinternals{BassFigure}-Objekte auch erstellt werden.
+Die Unterstützung für Generalbass besteht aus zwei Teilen: Es gibt
+einen Eingabe-Modus, aktiviert durch den Befehl @code{\figuremode},
+in dem Ziffern für den Bass als Nummern eingegeben werden können,
+und einen Kontext @code{FiguredBass}, der dafür sorgt, dass die
+entsprechenden @code{BassFigure}-Objekte auch erstellt werden.
+Generalbass kann auch in einem @code{Staff}-Kontext dargestellt
+werden.
+
+@code{\figures@{ ... @}} ist eine Kurznotation für
+@code{\new FiguredBass @{ \figuremode @{ ... @} @}}.
+
+Auch wenn die Unterstützung für Generalbass auf den ersten Blick
+wie die Akkordunterstützung ausschauen mag, ist sie sehr viel
+einfacher. @code{\figuremode} speichert einfach die Zahlen und der
+@code{FiguredBass}-Kontext setzt sie in der Form, wie sie notiert
+wurden. Sie werden nicht in Tonhöhen umgewandelt.
+
+@seealso
+Glossar:
+@rglos{figured bass}.
-Im Eingabemodus wird eine Gruppe von Bassziffern mit den Zeichen
+Schnipsel:
+@rlsr{Chords}
+
+
+@node Entering figured bass
+@unnumberedsubsubsec Entering figured bass
+
+@code{\figuremode} (Zahlenmodus) wird benutzt, um den Eingabemodus
+auf den Zahlenmodus umzustellen. Mehr Information zu unterschiedlichen
+Eingabemodi findet sich in @ref{Input modes}.
+
+Im Zahlenmodus wird eine Gruppe von Bassziffern mit den Zeichen
@code{<} and @code{>} begrenzt. Die Dauer wird nach dem @code{>}-Zeichen
eingegeben.
-@example
-<4 6>
-@end example
-@lilypond[quote,ragged-right,fragment]
-\new FiguredBass
-\figuremode { <4 6> }
+@lilypond[verbatim,quote,ragged-right,fragment]
+\new FiguredBass {
+ \figuremode {
+ <6 4>2
+ }
+}
+@end lilypond
+
+Versetzungszeichen (inklusive Auflösungszeichen) können hinzugefügt
+werden:
+
+@lilypond[verbatim,quote,ragged-right,fragment]
+\figures {
+ <7! 6+ 4-> <5++> <3-->
+}
@end lilypond
-Versetzungszeichen werden durch Anhängen von @code{-}, @code{!} und @code{+}
-hinter die Nummern erreicht. Ein Pluszeichen wird mit dem Befehl @code{\+}
-gesetzt, verminderte Quinten und Septimen mit @code{5/} und @code{7/}.
+Übermäßige und verminderte Stufen können dargestellt werden:
-@example
-<4- 6+ 7!> <5++> <3--> <7/> r <6\+ 5/>
-@end example
-@lilypond[quote,ragged-right,fragment]
-\figures { <4- 6+ 7!> <5++> <3--> <7/> r <6\+ 5/> }
+@lilypond[verbatim,quote,ragged-right,fragment]
+\figures {
+ <6\+ 5/> <7/>
+}
@end lilypond
-Pausen können mit @code{_} notiert werden. Klammern werden mit @code{[}
-und @code{]} gesetzt. Text kann auch eingefügt werden nach den Regeln im
-Abschnitt @ref{Text markup commands}.
+Ein Schrägstrich von links nach rechts (üblicherweise für erhöhte
+Sexten benutzt) kann erstellt werden:
-@example
-< [4 6] 8 [_! 12] > < 5 \markup @{ \number 6 \super (1) @} >
-@end example
-@lilypond[quote,ragged-right,fragment]
-\new FiguredBass
-\figuremode { < [4 6] 8 [_! 12] > < 5 \markup{ \tiny \number 6 \super (1)} > }
+@lilypond[verbatim,quote,ragged-right,fragment]
+\figures {
+ <6> <6\\>
+}
+@end lilypond
+
+Vertikaler Platz und Klammern können zu den Zahlen hinzugefügt
+werden:
+
+@lilypond[verbatim,quote,ragged-right,fragment]
+\figures {
+ <[12 _!] 8 [6 4]>
+}
@end lilypond
-Es ist auch möglich, Vortsetzungslinien für wiederholte Ziffern zu benutzen.
+Beliebiger Text kann als Zahl notiert werden:
-@lilypond[verbatim,relative=1]
+@lilypond[verbatim,quote,ragged-right,fragment]
+\figures {
+ <\markup { \tiny \number 6 \super (1) } 5>
+}
+@end lilypond
+
+Es ist auch möglich, Fortsetzungslinien für wiederholte Ziffern zu benutzen.
+
+@lilypond[verbatim,quote,ragged-right,fragment]
<<
- \new Staff {
+ {
\clef bass
- c4 c c
+ e4 d c b,
+ e4 d c b,
}
\figures {
- \set useBassFigureExtenders = ##t
- <4 6> <3 6> <3 7>
+ \bassFigureExtendersOn
+ <6 4>4 <6 3> <7 3> <7 3>
+ \bassFigureExtendersOff
+ <6 4>4 <6 3> <7 3> <7 3>
}
>>
@end lilypond
@noindent
-In diesem Fall werden wiederholte Ziffern immer durch eine Linie ersetzt.
+In diesem Fall werden wiederholte Ziffern immer durch eine Linie ersetzt, es sei denn, die Linie wird explizit beendet.
-Der @code{FiguredBass}-Kontext kümmert sich nicht um die aktuelle Basslinie.
-Als Konsequenz müssen eventuell zusätzliche Ziffern eingefügt werden, um
-Linien unter alle Noten zu erhalten, und die Verwendung von @code{\!}
-kann nötig werden, um zu lange Linien zu stoppen.
-
-@lilypond[relative=1]
+@lilypond[verbatim,quote,ragged-right,fragment]
<<
- \new Voice
\figures {
- \set useBassFigureExtenders = ##t
- <6 4->4. <6 4->16. <6 4->32 <5>8. r16 <6>8 <6\! 5->
+ \bassFigureExtendersOn
+ <6 4>4 <6 4> <6\! 4\!> <6 4>
}
{
\clef bass
- f16. g32 f16. g32 f16. g32 f16. g32 f8. es16 d8 es
+ d4 d c c
}
>>
@end lilypond
-Bei der Benutzung von Linien werden gemeinsame Ziffern immer in die
-gleiche vertikale Position gesetzt. Wenn dies nicht gewünscht ist,
-können Pausen (@code{r}) eingefügt werden. Dadurch wird die vorangegangene
-Positionierung aufgehoben. So kann man etwa
-
-@example
- <4 6>8 r8
-@end example
-@noindent
-anstelle von
-@example
- <4 6>4
-@end example
+Die folgende Tabelle zeigt die vorhandenen Zahlenmodifikatoren:
+
+@multitable @columnfractions .1 .5 .4
+
+@item
+@b{Modifier}
+@tab
+@b{Purpose}
+@tab
+@b{Example}
+
+@item
++, -, !
+@tab
+Accidentals
+@tab
+@lilypond[line-width=4\cm]
+\figures {
+ <7! 6+ 4-> <5++> <3-->
+}
+@end lilypond
-@noindent
-schreiben.
+@item
+\+, /
+@tab
+Augmented and diminished steps
+@tab
+@lilypond[line-width=4\cm]
+\figures {
+ <6\+ 5/> <7/>
+}
+@end lilypond
-Versetzungszeichen und Pluszeichen können vor oder nach den Ziffern stehen,
-abhängig von den @code{figuredBassAlterationDirection}- und
-@code{figuredBassPlusDirection}-Eigenschaften.
+@item
+\\
+@tab
+Raised sixth step
+@tab
+@lilypond[line-width=4\cm]
+\figures {
+ <6\\>
+}
+@end lilypond
-@lilypond
+@item
+\!
+@tab
+End of continuation line
+@tab
+@lilypond[line-width=4\cm]
+<<
\figures {
- <6\+> <5+> <6 4-> r
- \set figuredBassAlterationDirection = #1
- <6\+> <5+> <6 4-> r
- \set figuredBassPlusDirection = #1
- <6\+> <5+> <6 4-> r
- \set figuredBassAlterationDirection = #-1
- <6\+> <5+> <6 4-> r
+ \bassFigureExtendersOn
+ <6 4> <6 4> <6\! 4\!> <6 4>
}
+ {
+ \clef bass
+ d d c c
+ }
+>>
@end lilypond
-Auch wenn die Unterstützung für bezifferten Bass anscheinend an die
-Akkord-Notation erinnert, ist sie doch sehr viel einfacher. Der Modus
-@code{\figuremode} speichert einfach die Ziffern und der
-@rinternals{FiguredBass}-Kontext gibt sie so aus, wie sie notiert
-werden. Es gibt also keine Umrechnung von Tonhöhen und die Notation
-wird in der MIDI-Datei nicht umgesetzt.
+@end multitable
-Programmintern erstellt die Funktion einfache Textbeschriftung. Somit
-sind alle Textbeschriftungsbefehle verfügbar, um die Formatierungen zu
-verändern. So kann zum Beispiel die vertikale Position der Ziffern mit
-@code{baseline-skip} gesetzt werden.
+@predefined
+@cindex Generalbass Fortsetzungslinie
+@code{\bassFigureExtendersOn},
+@code{\bassFigureExtendersOff}.
+@endpredefined
-Bassziffern können auch direkt einem Notensystemkontext (@code{Staff})
-hinzugefügt werden. In diesem Fall wird ihre vertikale Position automatisch
-bestimmt.
-@lilypond[ragged-right,fragment,quote]
+@snippets
+@lilypondfile[verbatim,lilyquote,texidoc,doctitle]
+{changing-the-positions-of-figured-bass-alterations.ly}
+
+
+@seealso
+Schnipsel:
+@rlsr{Chords}.
+
+Referenz der Interna:
+@rinternals{BassFigure},
+@rinternals{BassFigureAlignment},
+@rinternals{BassFigureLine},
+@rinternals{BassFigureBracket},
+@rinternals{BassFigureContinuation},
+@rinternals{FiguredBass}.
+
+
+
+@node Displaying figured bass
+@unnumberedsubsubsec Displaying figured bass
+
+Generalbass kann mit dem @code{FiguredBass}-Kontext, aber auch in
+den meisten anderen @code{Staff}-Kontexten dargestellt werden.
+
+Wenn die Ziffern im @code{FiguredBass}-Kontext dargestellt werden,
+ist die vertikale Position der Ziffern unabhängig von den Noten
+des paralellen Systems.
+
+@lilypond[verbatim,ragged-right,fragment,quote]
<<
- \new Staff = someUniqueName
\relative c'' {
c4 c'8 r8 c,4 c'
}
+ \new FiguredBass {
+ \figuremode {
+ <4>4 <10 6>8 s8
+ <6 4>4 <6 4>
+ }
+ }
+>>
+@end lilypond
- %% send to existing Staff.
- \context Staff = someUniqueName
- \figuremode {
- <4>4 <6 10>8 s8
+In diesem Beispiel muss der @code{FiguredBass}-Kontext explizit
+erstellt werden, damit kein zusätzliches (leeres) Notensystem
+erstellt wird.
- \set Staff.useBassFigureExtenders = ##t
- <4 6>4 <4 6>
+Bassziffern können auch direkt einem Notensystemkontext (@code{Staff})
+hinzugefügt werden. In diesem Fall wird ihre vertikale Position automatisch
+bestimmt.
+
+@lilypond[verbatim,ragged-right,fragment,quote]
+<<
+ \new Staff = myStaff
+ \figuremode {
+ <4>4 <10 6>8 s8
+ <6 4>4 <6 4>
+ }
+ %% Put notes on same Staff as figures
+ \context Staff = myStaff
+ {
+ \clef bass
+ c4 c'8 r8 c4 c'
}
>>
@end lilypond
-@commonprop
+Wenn Generalbass zu einem vorhandenen System hinzugefügt wird, ist
+es möglich, die Ziffern über oder unter dem System anzuzeigen:
-In der Standardeinstellung werden die Bassziffern über den Noten
-ausgegeben. Um Ziffern unter den Noten zu erhalten, kann der
-Befehl
+@lilypond[verbatim,ragged-right,fragment,quote]
+<<
+ \new Staff = myStaff
+ \figuremode {
+ <4>4 <10 6>8 s8
+ \bassFigureStaffAlignmentDown
+ <6 4>4 <6 4>
+ }
+ %% Put notes on same Staff as figures
+ \context Staff = myStaff
+ {
+ \clef bass
+ c4 c'8 r8 c4 c'
+ }
+>>
+@end lilypond
-@example
-\override Staff.BassFigureAlignmentPositioning #'direction = #DOWN
-@end example
+Schnipsel:
+@rlsr{Chords}.
-@noindent
-benutzt werden.
+Referenz der Interna:
+@rinternals{BassFigure},
+@rinternals{BassFigureAlignment},
+@rinternals{BassFigureLine},
+@rinternals{BassFigureBracket},
+@rinternals{BassFigureContinuation},
+@rinternals{FiguredBass}.
@knownissues
-Wenn Bassziffern über dem Notensystem mit Ergänzungslinien und
-@code{implicitBassFigures} benutzt werden, kann es vorkommen, dass
-die Linien vertauscht werden. Besonders kritisch wird es, wenn
-mehrere Bassziffern sich überschneidende Linien haben. Um dieses
-Problem zu vermeiden, sollte @code{stacking-dir}
-im @code{BassFigureAlignment} benutzt werden.
-
-
-@seealso
-Programmreferenz: @rinternals{BassFigure}-,
-@rinternals{BassFigureAlignment}-, @rinternals{BassFigureLine}-,
-@rinternals{BassFigureBracket}- und
-@rinternals{BassFigureContinuation}-Objekte und der
-@rinternals{FiguredBass}-Kontext.
+Um sicherzugehen, dass die Fortsetzungslinien funktionieren, sollte
+der gleiche Rhythmus für die Bassfiguren und die eigentlichen
+Noten der Bassstimme benutzt werden.
+@lilypond[verbatim,ragged-right,fragment,quote]
+<<
+ {
+ \clef bass
+ \repeat unfold 4 { f16. g32 } f8. es16 d8 es
+ }
+ \figures {
+ \bassFigureExtendersOn
+ % The extenders are correct here, with the same rhythm as the bass
+ \repeat unfold 4 { <6 4->16. <6 4->32 }
+ <5>8. r16 <6>8 <6\! 5->
+ }
+>>
+<<
+ {
+ \clef bass
+ \repeat unfold 4 { f16. g32 } f8. es16 d8 es
+ }
+ \figures {
+ \bassFigureExtendersOn
+ % The extenders are incorrect here, even though the timing is the same
+ <6 4->4 <6 4->4
+ <5>8. r16 <6>8 <6\! 5->
+ }
+>>
+@end lilypond
-@node Entering figured bass
-@unnumberedsubsubsec Entering figured bass
+Wenn Fortsetzungslinien eingesetzt werden, können aufeinander
+folgende Bezifferungen mit der selben Zahl in einer anderen
+Position dazu führen, dass sich die Reihenfolge der Zahlen
+umkehrt.
-@untranslated
+@lilypond[verbatim,ragged-right,fragment,quote,relative=1]
+<<
+ { fis4 g g, e' }
+ \figures {
+ \bassFigureExtendersOn
+ <6 5>4 <5\! 4> < 5 _!> <6>
+ }
+>>
+@end lilypond
-@node Displaying figured bass
-@unnumberedsubsubsec Displaying figured bass
+Um dieses Problem zu umgehen, kann die Fortsetzungslinie nach der
+Bezifferung, mit der die Linie beginnen soll, angeschaltet und
+am Ende der Linie wieder ausgeschaltet werden.
-@untranslated
+@lilypond[verbatim,ragged-right,fragment,quote,relative=1]
+<<
+ { fis4 g g, e' }
+ \figures {
+ <6 5>4 <5 4>
+ \bassFigureExtendersOn
+ < 5 _!>4 <6>
+ \bassFigureExtendersOff
+ }
+>>
+@end lilypond
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; -*-
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 2c00bdbfaf62dd90863331c4713e6b29e32c9322
+ Translation of GIT committish: 4770e4e71ebff6104cad46bd2d889c3ff6ba3875
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
werden, die Schrift-Dateien benutzen. Das sind die, welche die
@code{font-interface}-Layoutschnittstelle unterstützen.
-@funindex \huge
-@funindex \teeny
-@funindex \small
-@funindex \tiny
-@funindex \normalsize
-@funindex \large
@predefined
@code{\teeny},
@funindex \stemNeutral
@funindex \stemUp
@funindex \stemDown
+@funindex stemNeutral
+@funindex stemUp
+@funindex stemDown
@predefined
@code{\stemUp} (Hälse nach oben),
@funindex Balloon_engraver
@funindex balloonGrobText
@funindex balloonText
+@funindex balloonLengthOn
+@funindex balloonLengthOff
+@funindex \balloonLengthOn
+@funindex \balloonLengthOff
+
Notationselemente können bezeichnet und markiert werden, indem um sie eine
rechteckige Blase gezeichnet wird. Dies ist vor allem dazu da, Notation
}
@end lilypond
-@funindex balloonLengthOn
-@funindex balloonLengthOff
-@funindex \balloonLengthOn
-@funindex \balloonLengthOff
@predefined
@code{\balloonLengthOn},
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: de -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 2c00bdbfaf62dd90863331c4713e6b29e32c9322
+ Translation of GIT committish: 4770e4e71ebff6104cad46bd2d889c3ff6ba3875
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@end lilypond
Fingersatz und Barre kann im ausführlichen Modus notiert werden.
+Nur im ausführlichen Modus kann ein Capo angezeigt werden, das auf
+dem Bunddiagramm plaziert wird. Die Capo-Anzeige ist ein dicker
+Strich, der alle Saiten bedeckt. Der Bund mit dem Capo ist der
+unterste Bund im Diagramm.
@c \override is necessary to make fingering visible
@lilypond[quote, verbatim]
Bunddiagramme können zu der Tabelle hinzugefügt werden. Um ein
Diagramm hinzuzufügen, muss der Akkord des Diagramms, die Stimmung
-und die Diagramm-Definition im @code{fret-diagram-terse}-Modus
-definiert werden.
+und die Diagramm-Definition angegeben werden. Die Diagramm-Definition
+kann entweder eine @code{fret-diagram-terse}-Definition oder eine
+@code{fret-diagram-verbose}-Liste sein.
@lilypond[verbatim, ragged-right, quote]
\include "predefined-guitar-fretboards.ly"
die am Hals entlang verschoben werden können und dabei unterschiedliche
Akkorde ergeben. Akkordformen können zu der internen Liste
hinzugefügt werden und dann benutzt werden, um vordefinierte
-Bunddiagramme zu definieren.
+Bunddiagramme zu definieren. Wie Bunddiagramme können auch
+Akkordformen entweder als @code{fret-diagram-terse}-Definition
+oder als @code{fret-diagram-verbose}-Liste erstellt werden.
@lilypond[verbatim, ragged-right, quote]
\include "predefined-guitar-fretboards.ly"
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: de -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond-learning.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 2c00bdbfaf62dd90863331c4713e6b29e32c9322
+ Translation of GIT committish: 4770e4e71ebff6104cad46bd2d889c3ff6ba3875
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: de -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 02cb8b672238eeb53bffa2240c87f23dd8ca9e60
+ Translation of GIT committish: 4770e4e71ebff6104cad46bd2d889c3ff6ba3875
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 2c00bdbfaf62dd90863331c4713e6b29e32c9322
+ Translation of GIT committish: 4770e4e71ebff6104cad46bd2d889c3ff6ba3875
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: de -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 2c00bdbfaf62dd90863331c4713e6b29e32c9322
+ Translation of GIT committish: 4770e4e71ebff6104cad46bd2d889c3ff6ba3875
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@end itemize
+
+@c @snippets
+@c @lilypondfile[verbatim,lilyquote,texidoc,doctitle]
+@c {forcing-visibility-of-systems-with-multi-bar-rests-when-using-\RemoveEmptyStaffContext.ly}
+@c http://lsr.dsi.unimi.it/LSR/Item?u=1&id=312
+
+
@seealso
Handbuch zum Lernen:
@rlearning{Real music example},
Wenn individuelle Kontrolle über die einzelen Systeme benötigt
wird, können sie manuell mit den Bezeichnungen @code{"up"} und
@code{"down"} erstellt werden. Der @code{\autochange}-Befehl
-wechselt dann die Stimme zwischen den Systemen. Das ist etwa
-nötig, damit ein Tonart für das untere System definiert werden
-kann.
+wechselt dann die Stimme zwischen den Systemen.
-@lilypond[quote,verbatim]
+@warning{Wenn Systeme manuell erstellt werden, @strong{müssen} sie genau
+die Bezeichnungen @code{"up"} und @code{"down"} bekommen, damit die
+automatische Wechselfunktion sie erkennen kann.}
+
+Systeme müssen etwa manuell erstellt werden, damit die Tonart im unteren
+System gesetzt werden kann:
+
+@c Keep Ly needed, otherwise 'up' and 'down' get
+@c incorrectly translated in verbatim output
+@c KEEP LY
+@lilypond[quote,verbatim,nogettext]
\new PianoStaff <<
\new Staff = "up" {
- \new Voice = "melOne" {
+ \new Voice = "melodieEins" {
\key g \major
\autochange \relative c' {
g8 b a c b d c e
Schnipsel:
@rlsr{Keyboards}.
+
+
+@node Harp
+@subsection Harp
+
+Dieser Abschnitt zeigt Eigenheiten der Notation für Harfe.
+
@menu
-* Harp notation::
+* References for harps::
* Harp pedals::
@end menu
-@node Harp
-@subsection Harp
+@node References for harps
+@unnumberedsubsubsec References for harps
-TBC
+@cindex Harfe
-@ignore
-Some possibilities:
-- glissandi
-- tremolo (for bisbigliando)
-- natural harmonics
-- directional arpeggio and non-arpeggio
-- workaroung for keeping both staves visible in an orchestral
- score,
-http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/lilypond-user/2007-08/msg00386.html
-and http://lsr.dsi.unimi.it/LSR/Item?u=1&id=312
-
-An LSR snippet could be used to demonstrate the main items; in the
-case of glissandi, it would be desirable to have a demonstration
-of different styles.
+Einige übliche Notationseigenheiten für Harfe sind woanders behandelt:
+
+@itemize
+
+@item Glissando ist die üblichste Harfentechnik, siehe
+@ref{Glissando}.
+
+@item Ein @notation{Bisbigliando} wird als ein Tremolo notiert, siehe @ref{Tremolo
+repeats}
+
+@item Flageolettöne werden hier beschrieben: @ref{Harmonics}.
+
+@item Für Arpeggio und non-arpeggio, siehe @ref{Arpeggio}.
+
+@end itemize
+
+@seealso
+Notationsreferenz:
+@ruser{Tremolo repeats}
+@ruser{Glissando}
+@ruser{Arpeggio}
+@ruser{Harmonics}
-@end ignore
@node Harp pedals
@seealso
Notationsreferenz:
@ruser{Text scripts}
+@ruser{Instrument Specific Markup}
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: de -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond-program.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 2c00bdbfaf62dd90863331c4713e6b29e32c9322
+ Translation of GIT committish: 4770e4e71ebff6104cad46bd2d889c3ff6ba3875
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
f2 e
@end example
+@noindent
+Wenn Kommentare und Variablen im Zitat, aber nicht im Quelltext
+übersetzt werden sollen, kann die Umgebungsvariable @code{LYDOC_LOCALEDIR}
+auf einen Verzeichnispfad gesetzt werden. Das Verzeichnis sollte
+einen Baum an @file{.mo}-Nachrichtenkatalogen beinhalten mit
+@code{lilypond-doc} als Domain.
+
@item addversion
(Nur innerhalb von Texinfo-Dateien.) Stellt @code{\version
@@w@{"@@version@{@}"@}} an den Beginn des Fragments der Ausgabe mit
Ergebnis:
@example
-lilypond-book --process="lilypond --format=tex --tex \
- --header=texidoc test.texinfo
+lilypond-book --pdf --process="lilypond \
+ -dbackend=eps --header=texidoc" test.texinfo
@end example
Die meisten Test-Dateien (im @file{input/} Verzeichnis von LilyPond)
allerdings in Ihrem Texinfo-Dokument als Makro selbst definiert werden.
Die Übersetzung funktioniert völlig analog zu @code{texidoc}.
+@item nogettext
+Nur für Texinfo-Ausgabe: Kommentare und Variablenbezeichnungen im
+zitierten Quelltext des Schnipsel werden nicht übersetzt.
+
@item printfilename
Wenn eine LilyPond-Datei mittels @code{\lilypondfile} und dieser Option
eingebunden wird, wird der Dateiname (ohne die Pfadangabe) unmittelbar vor
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: de -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: b54fc6953a8d70a3c51e8c3d0cbf9b3fe9652d78
+ Translation of GIT committish: 2c00bdbfaf62dd90863331c4713e6b29e32c9322
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@table @cite
+
@item Ignatzek 1995
Klaus Ignatzek, Die Jazzmethode für Klavier. Schott's Söhne
1995. Mainz, Germany ISBN 3-7957-5140-3.
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; -*-
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 2881ea603b63e4e335dc1104b0c22c71f373b20d
+ Translation of GIT committish: 4770e4e71ebff6104cad46bd2d889c3ff6ba3875
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; -*-
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 2c00bdbfaf62dd90863331c4713e6b29e32c9322
+ Translation of GIT committish: 4770e4e71ebff6104cad46bd2d889c3ff6ba3875
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@cindex Tonhöhenbezeichnungen
@cindex Absoluter Modus: Tonhöhen
@cindex Absolute Spezifikation von Oktaven
+@cindex Angabe der Oktave: absolut
Tonhöhenbezeichnungen werden durch Kleinbuchstaben
von@tie{}@code{a} bis@tie{}@code{g} angegeben. Dabei
@cindex Oktavwechsel: Tonhöhe
@cindex Wechsel der Oktave
@cindex Tonhöhe: Wechsel der Oktave
+
@funindex '
@funindex ,
@cindex Relativ
@cindex Relative Oktavbestimmung
+@cindex Oktavbestimmung, relativ
@cindex Noteneingabe: relative Oktavbestimmung
+
@funindex \relative
+@funindex relative
Wenn Oktaven im absoluten Modus notiert, passiert es
schnell, eine Note auf der falschen Oktave zu notieren. Mit
}
@end lilypond
+@cindex Akkorde und relativer Modus
+@cindex relativer Modus und Akkorde
+@cindex Oktavenmodus (relativ) und Akkorde
+
Wenn der vorherige Ausdruck ein Akkord ist, wird die erste Note
des Akkordes benutzt, um die erste Note des nächsten Akkordes zu
bestimmen. Innerhalb von Akkorden ist die nächste Note immer
@cindex Relativer Oktavenmodus und Transposition
@cindex Transposition und relativer Modus
+
@funindex \transpose
@funindex \chordmode
@funindex \relative
+@funindex transpose
+@funindex chordmode
+@funindex relative
@knownissues
signatures}.}
@cindex Notenbezeichnungen, Deutsch
+@cindex Notenbezeichnungen, Holländisch
@cindex Notenbezeichnungen, Standard
@cindex Versetzungszeichen, Deutsch
+@cindex Standardnotenbezeichnungen
@cindex Kreuz
@cindex B
@cindex Doppelkreuz
@cindex Vorzeichen, Vierteltöne
@cindex Versetzungszeichen, Vierteltöne
@cindex Mikrotöne
+@cindex Halbkreuz
+@cindex Halb-B
Versetzungszeichen für Vierteltöne werden durch Anhängen der Endungen
@code{-eh} (Erniedrigung) und @code{-ih} (Erhöhung) an den
@cindex Vorzeichen in Klammern
@cindex Erinnerungsvorzeichen
@cindex Warnungsvorzeichen
-@funindex ?
@cindex Klammern um Vorzeichen
+
+@funindex ?
@funindex !
Normalerweise werden Versetzungszeichen automatisch gesetzt, aber
@cindex Oktavenüberprüfung
@cindex Oktavierungskorrektur
@cindex Kontroll-Tonhöhe
+
@funindex =
@funindex \octaveCheck
+@funindex octaveCheck
@funindex controlpitch
Im relativen Modus geschieht es recht häufig, dass ein
@cindex Transponieren
@cindex Noten, transponieren
@cindex Tonhöhen, transponieren
+
@funindex \transpose
+@funindex transpose
Ein musikalischer Ausdruck kann mit dem Befehl @code{\transpose}
transponiert werden. Die Syntax lautet:
}
@end lilypond
-@cindex Transponierende Instrumente
-@cindex Instrumente, transponierende
-
Wenn eine Stimme, die in C notiert ist, von einer A-Klarinette
gespielt werden soll (für die A als C notiert wird,
aber eine kleine Terz tiefer erklingt als es notiert
@funindex \transpose
@funindex \chordmode
@funindex \relative
+@funindex transpose
+@funindex chordmode
+@funindex relative
@knownissues
@node Clef
@unnumberedsubsubsec Clef
-@funindex \clef
@cindex G-Schlüssel
@cindex C-Schlüssel
@cindex F-Schlüssel
@cindex Schlüssel, G
@cindex Schlüssel, F
+@funindex \clef
+@funindex clef
+
Der Schlüssel kann verändert werden. Das eingestrichene
C wird in jedem Beispiel gezeigt:
Weitere unterstützte Schlüssel sind beschrieben in @ref{Ancient clefs}.
-@cindex transposing clefs
-@cindex clef, transposing
-@cindex octave transposition
-@cindex choral tenor clef
+@cindex transponierende Schlüssel
+@cindex Schlüssel, transponierend
+@cindex Oktavtransposition
+@cindex Chor-Tenorschlüssel
+@cindex Tenorschlüssel, Chor
Indem @code{_8} oder @code{^8} an die jeweilige Schlüsselbezeichnung
angehängt wird, wird der Schlüssel um eine Oktave nach oben oder unten
@cindex Tonart
@cindex Vorzeichen
+
@funindex \key
+@funindex key
@c duplicated in Key signature and Accidentals
@warning{Neue Benutzer sind manchmal verwirrt, wie
@funindex \lydian
@funindex \phrygian
@funindex \dorian
+@funindex minor
+@funindex major
+@funindex minor
+@funindex ionian
+@funindex locrian
+@funindex aeolian
+@funindex mixolydian
+@funindex lydian
+@funindex phrygian
+@funindex dorian
+
@cindex Kirchentonarten
@cindex Modus
@cindex Dur
@cindex 8va
@cindex 8ve
@cindex Oktavierung
+
@funindex set-octavation
+@funindex \ottava
+@funindex ottava
@notation{Oktavierungsklammern} zeigen eine zusätzliche
Transposition von einer Oktave an:
@cindex Transponierendes Instrument
@cindex MIDI
@cindex MIDI-Transposition
+
@funindex \transposition
+@funindex transposition
Wenn man Noten setzt, die von transponierenden Instrumenten
gespielt werden, sind oft einige Stimmen auf einer
@cindex Automatische Versetzungszeichen
@cindex Versetzungszeichen, automatisch
@cindex Standard-Versetzungszeichenstil
+
@funindex set-accidental-style
@funindex voice
+@funindex default
Es gibt viele unterschiedliche Regeln, wie Versetzungszeichen
notiert werden. LilyPond hat eine Funktion, mit der
Um jeden Stil zu erklären, wird folgendes Beispiel
benützt:
-@funindex default
-
@lilypond[verbatim,quote]
musicA = {
<<
@cindex Standard-Versetzungszeichenstil
@cindex Versetzungszeichenstil, Standard
-@funindex default
Das ist das Standardverhalten. Es entspricht der
Konvention für Notation von Musik des 18. Jahrhunderts:
@cindex Versetzungszeichenstil modern
@cindex Versetzungszeichenstil, modern-cautionary
@cindex modern-Warnung-Versetzungszeichenstil
+
@funindex voice
Das normale Verhalten ist es, die Versetzungszeichen
@cindex Versetzungszeichen, moderne Stile
@cindex Moderner Stil, Versetzungszeichen
+
@funindex modern
Dieser Stil orientiert sich an den üblichen Regeln für
@cindex Versetzungszeichen, moderner Stil mit Warnungen
@cindex moderner Versetzungszeichenstil
@cindex moderner Verseztungszeichenstil mit Warnungen
+
@funindex modern-cautionary
Dieser Stil ähnelt @code{modern}, aber die @qq{zusätzlichen}
@cindex moderner Versetzungszeichenstil
@cindex moderne Versetzungszeichen
@cindex Stimmen, Versetzungszeichen für
+
@funindex modern-voice
Diese Regel wird für vielstimmige Noten benutzt, die sowohl von
@cindex Versetzungszeichenstil, modern mit Warnung für Stimmen
@cindex Stimmen, Versetzungszeichenstil mit Warnung für Stimmen
@cindex moderner Versetzungszeichensitl mit Warnungen für Stimmen
+
@funindex modern-voice-cautionary
@item modern-voice-cautionary (modern mit Warnungen für einzelne Stimmen)
@cindex Versetzungszeichen für Klavier
@cindex Klavier-Versetzungszeichenstil
@cindex Piano-Versetzungszeichenstil
+
@funindex piano
Dieser Stil orientiert sich an den Regeln im 20. Jahrhundert für die
@item piano-cautionary (Klavier mit Warnungen)
@funindex piano-cautionary
+
@cindex Versetzungszeichen, piano cautionary
@cindex Warnungsversetzungszeichen für Klavier
@cindex Klavier: Warnungsversetzungszeichen
@item neo-modern
@funindex neo-modern
+
@cindex neo-moderner Versetzungszeichenstil
@cindex Versetzungszeichenstil, neo-modern
@item neo-modern-cautionary (neo-modern mit Warnungen)
@funindex neo-modern-cautionary
+
@cindex neo-modern-cautionary-Versetzungszeichenstil
@cindex Versetzungszeichenstil neo-modern mit Warnungen
@cindex Warnungsversetzungszeichen, neo-modern
@item dodecaphonic (Zwölftonmusik)
@funindex dodecaphonic
+
@cindex dodekaphoner Versetzungszeichenstil
@cindex Zwölftonmusik, Versetzungszeichenstil
@cindex Versetzungszeichenstil, Zwölftonmusik
@item teaching (didaktisch)
@funindex teaching
+
@cindex teaching-Versetzungszeichenstil
@cindex Versetzungszeichenstil teaching
@cindex didaktischer Versetzungszeichenstil
@item no-reset (nicht zurücksetzen)
@funindex no-reset
+
@cindex Versetzungszeichenstil, no reset
@cindex Versetzungszeichenstil: nicht zurücksetzen
@item forget (vergessen)
@funindex forget
+
@cindex forget-Versetzungszeichenstil
@cindex Versetzungszeichenstil forget
@cindex Versetzungszeichenstil Vergessen
@cindex Gitarrennotenköpfe
@cindex Flageolett-Notenköpfe
@cindex Stile, Notenköpfe
+
@funindex cross
Notenköpfe können verändert werden:
@cindex Anfänger, Notenlernen
@cindex Notenköpfe für Anfänger
+@funindex \easyHeadsOn
+@funindex easyHeadsOn
+@funindex \easyHeadsOff
+@funindex easyHeadsOff
+
Die @qq{einfachen Notenköpfe} haben die Bezeichnung der Note
im Kopf gedruckt. Das wird eingesetzt, um die Notation beizubringen.
Damit die Buchstaben noch lesbar sind, müssen sie sehr groß
@cindex Form-Notenköpfe
@cindex Aiken-Notenköpfe
@cindex sacred harp-Notenköpfe
+
@funindex \key
@funindex \aikenHeads
@funindex \sacredHarpHeads
+@funindex key
+@funindex aikenHeads
+@funindex sacredHarpHeads
In dieser Notation haben die Notenköpfe eine Form, die ihrer
harmonischen Funktion innherhalb der Tonleiter entspricht. Die
Skala, wobei der Grundton der Skala aus dem @code{\key}-Befehl
entnommen wird.
-@funindex \aikenHeads
-@funindex \sacredHarpHeads
-
@predefined
@code{\aikenHeads},
@code{\sacredHarpHeads}.
@cindex Strichnotenköpfe
@cindex Striche: Notenköpfe
+@funindex \improvisationOn
+@funindex improvisationOn
+@funindex \improvisationOff
+@funindex improvisationOff
+
Improvisation wird manchmal angezeigt, indem schräge Notenköpfe
gesetzt werden, wenn der Spieler eine beliebige Tonhöhe wählen kann
aber den vorgegebenen Rhythmus spielen soll. Sie können wie folgt
}
@end lilypond
-@funindex \improvisationOn
-@funindex \improvisationOff
-
@predefined
@code{\improvisationOn},
@code{\improvisationOff}.
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: de -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 4a527608c5ff2ce31e596495d00dce181dc1b9ea
+ Translation of GIT committish: b4a63b6e388283e2f2ac73c3c99da205d209e28a
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
* Markup programmer interface::
* Contexts for programmers::
* Scheme procedures as properties::
-* TODO moved into scheme::
+* Using Scheme code instead of \tweak::
+* Difficult tweaks::
@end menu
@node Music functions
@untranslated
-@node TODO moved into scheme
-@section TODO moved into scheme
-
-@untranslated
-
-
-@menu
-* Using Scheme code instead of \tweak::
-* Difficult tweaks::
-@end menu
-
@node Using Scheme code instead of \tweak
-@subsection Using Scheme code instead of @code{\tweak}
+@section Using Scheme code instead of @code{\tweak}
@untranslated
@node Difficult tweaks
-@subsection Difficult tweaks
+@section Difficult tweaks
@untranslated
Taktangaben werden zu Beginn eines Stückes gesetzt und immer dann,
wenn sich die Taktart ändert. Wenn eine Änderung am Ende einer
Zeile geschieht, wird eine warnende Taktangabe am Ende der Zeile
-ausgegeben. Dieses Verhalten kann verändert werdenm, siehe
-@ref{Controlling visibility of objects}.
+ausgegeben. Dieses Verhalten kann verändert werden, siehe
+@ref{Visibility of objects}.
@lilypond[quote,verbatim,relative=2]
\time 2/4
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: de -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond-program.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 2c00bdbfaf62dd90863331c4713e6b29e32c9322
+ Translation of GIT committish: 4770e4e71ebff6104cad46bd2d889c3ff6ba3875
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@item backend
Gibt an, welches Ausgabeformat das LilyPond Backend benutzt. Mögliche Werte
für diese Option sind:
+
@table @code
@item ps
PostScript-Ausgabeformat.
LilyPond benutzt werden.
@cindex Scheme dump
+
+@item null
+Keine Partitur wird ausgegeben, hat gleichen Effekt wie @code{-dno-print-pages}.
+
@end table
Beispiel: @code{lilypond -dbackend=svg @var{Dateiname}.ly}
@item --pdf
Erzeugt PDF-Dateien. Dies impliziert @code{--ps}.
-
-
@item -j,--jail=@var{Benutzer},@var{Gruppe},@var{Jail-Verzeichnis},@var{Arbeitsverzeichnis}
Führt @command{lilypond} in einem chroot-Jail aus.
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: de -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 3121682025660b6c85fbf3f22bb9cd8396699ad1
+ Translation of GIT committish: 4770e4e71ebff6104cad46bd2d889c3ff6ba3875
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: de -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 2c00bdbfaf62dd90863331c4713e6b29e32c9322
+ Translation of GIT committish: 4770e4e71ebff6104cad46bd2d889c3ff6ba3875
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@snippets
-@ignore
-@c TODO Replace following example with this snippet when available
-@c Submitted to LSR 30 Nov 08
@lilypondfile[verbatim,lilyquote,ragged-right,texidoc,doctitle]
-{stand--alone-two--column-markup.ly}
-@end ignore
-
-Text alleine kann auch in mehreren Spalten angeordnet werden.
-
-@lilypond[verbatim,quote]
-\markup {
- \fill-line {
- \hspace #1.0
- \column {
- \line {"O sacrum convivium" }
- \line {"in quo Christus sumitur," }
- \line {"recolitur memoria passionis ejus," }
- \line {"mens impletur gratia," }
- \line {"futurae gloriae nobis pignus datur." }
- \line {"Amen."}
- }
- \hspace #2
- \column {
- \line { \italic {"O sacred feast"} }
- \line { \italic {"in which Christ is received,"} }
- \line { \italic {"the memory of His Passion is renewed,"} }
- \line { \italic {"the mind is filled with grace," } }
- \line { \italic {"and a pledge of future glory is given to us." }}
- \line { \italic {"Amen."}}
- }
- \hspace #1.0
- }
-}
-@end lilypond
+{stand-alone-two-column-markup.ly}
@seealso
Notationsreferenz:
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond-learning.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 2c00bdbfaf62dd90863331c4713e6b29e32c9322
+ Translation of GIT committish: 4770e4e71ebff6104cad46bd2d889c3ff6ba3875
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
tippen, und sie müssen immer absolut richtig sein. Wenn
derselbe Befehl mehrere Male benutzt werden muss, lohnt
es sich oft schon, eine Variable zu definieren, in der er
-sich befindet. Als Beispiel sollen einige Worte im
+sich befindet.
+
+Als Beispiel sollen einige Worte im
Gesangstext fett und kursiv hervorgehoben werden.
Die Befehle @code{\italic} und @code{\bold} funktionieren
-im Gesangstext-Kontext nur, wenn sie gleichzeitig
-noch in eine @code{\markup}-Umgebung eingeschlossen
-werden, was es mühsam macht, sie zu tippen. Als
+im Gesangstext-Kontext nur, wenn sie gleichzeitig mit den Wörtern,
+auf die sie angewendet werden sollen, zusätzlich
+in eine @code{\markup}-Umgebung eingeschlossen
+werden. Durch diese Einbettung können einzelne Wörter nicht
+einfach zu einer Variable umgeformt werden. Als
Alternative versuchen wir, einen Befehl mit
@code{\override} und @code{\revert} zu konstruieren.
@code{\revert Lyrics . LyricText #'font-series}
@end example
-Das wäre natürlich noch viel mühsamer. Also setzen wir
-anstatt dessen zwei Variablen, die diese Befehlsketten
-enthalten. Die Namen können natürlich auch kürzer sein,
-um noch weniger schreiben zu müssen. Die Benutzung der Befehle
-ist im Notenbeispiel gezeigt.
+Das wäre natürlich noch viel mühsamer, wenn viele Wörter eine
+Hervorhebung benötigen. Anstelle dieser Befehlsketten @emph{können}
+wir jedoch zwei Variablen definieren. Mit ihnen und dem entsprechenden
+Wort in geschweiften Klammern erreichen wir den gewünschten Effekt.
+Ein weiterer Vorteil ist, dass in diesem Fall die Leerzeichn um die
+Punkte herum nicht benötigt werden, weil sie nicht innerhalb des
+@code{lyricmode}-Kontextes interpretiert werden. Hier ein Beispiel;
+die Bezeichnungen können natürlich auch kürzer sein,
+um noch weniger schreiben zu müssen:
@cindex LyricText, Beispiel zur Veränderung
@cindex Gesangstext, Beispiel zur Veränderung
@lilypond[quote,verbatim]
emphasize = {
- \override Lyrics . LyricText #'font-shape = #'italic
- \override Lyrics . LyricText #'font-series = #'bold
+ \override Lyrics.LyricText #'font-shape = #'italic
+ \override Lyrics.LyricText #'font-series = #'bold
}
normal = {
- \revert Lyrics . LyricText #'font-shape
- \revert Lyrics . LyricText #'font-series
+ \revert Lyrics.LyricText #'font-shape
+ \revert Lyrics.LyricText #'font-series
}
global = { \time 4/4 \partial 4 \key c \major}
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: de -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 2c00bdbfaf62dd90863331c4713e6b29e32c9322
+ Translation of GIT committish: 4770e4e71ebff6104cad46bd2d889c3ff6ba3875
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; -*-
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 2c00bdbfaf62dd90863331c4713e6b29e32c9322
+ Translation of GIT committish: 4770e4e71ebff6104cad46bd2d889c3ff6ba3875
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@code{ignoreMelismata}-Eigenschaft im @code{Lyrics}-Kontext
vorgenommen.
-@c TODO: breaks compile
-@c seems to be fixed, does not break compile anymore --FV
@lilypond[verbatim,ragged-right,quote]
<<
\relative c' \new Voice = "lahlah" {
>>
@end lilypond
+@knownissues
+Anders als die meisten @code{\set}-Befehle funktioniert
+@code{\set ignoreMelismata} nicht zusammen mit @code{\once}.
+Es ist notwendig, explizit @code{\set} und @code{\unset} zu
+verwenden, um den Text einzugrenzen, für den Melismen ignoriert
+werden sollen.
+
@subsubheading Switching to an alternative melody
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: de -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 4a527608c5ff2ce31e596495d00dce181dc1b9ea
+ Translation of GIT committish: 2c00bdbfaf62dd90863331c4713e6b29e32c9322
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@end ignore
+@c Translators: Till Rettig
+
@node World music
@section World music
-@untranslated
+Dieser Abschnitt soll Besonderheiten der Notation aufzeigen, die
+insbesondere relevant sind, um Musik nicht-westlicher Tradition
+zu notieren.
@menu
@node Arabic music
@subsection Arabic music
-@untranslated
+Dieser Abschnitt zeigt Möglichkeiten, wie arabische Musik notiert
+werden kann.
@menu
@node References for Arabic music
@unnumberedsubsubsec References for Arabic music
-@untranslated
+@cindex arabische Musik
+@cindex Maqam
+
+Arabische Musik wurde bisher vor allem mündlich tradiert. Wenn
+Musik transkribiert wird, handelt es sich meistens um ein Gerüst,
+auf dem der Musiker eigene Improvisationen ausführt. Mehr und mehr
+wird die westliche Notation mit einigen Veränderungen benutzt, um
+die arabische Musiktradition weiterzugeben und zu konservieren.
+
+Einige Elemente der westlichen Notation wie etwa die Transkription
+von Akkorden oder eigenständige Stimmen werden für die traditionelleren
+arabischen Noten nicht benötigt. Es gibt allerdings einige andere
+Probleme, wie etwa die Notwendigkeit, Zwischenintervalle zu
+notieren, die sich irgendwo zwischen einem Halbton und einem
+Ganzton befinden. Daneben werden auch die westlichen Halb- und
+Ganztöne eingesetzt. Es muss auch möglich sein, eine große
+Anzahl an maqam (Modi) der arabischen Musik zu bezeichnen und zu
+gruppieren.
+
+Üblicherweise müssen Mikrotöne in der arabischen Musik nicht
+präzise notiert werden.
+
+Einige Bereiche, die für die arabische Notation wichtig sind, sind
+an anderer Stelle behandelt:
+
+@itemize
+@item Notenbezeichnungen und Versetzungszeichen (inklusive Vierteltöne)
+können angepasst werden, wie behandelt in
+@ref{Note names in other languages}.
+
+@item Zusätzliche Taktarten können erstellt werden, siehe
+@ref{Key signature}.
+
+@item Komplexe Taktarten erfordern evtl., dass Noten manual gruppiert
+werden, wie gezeigt in
+@ref{Manual beams}.
+
+@item @notation{Takasim}, rhythmisch freie Improvisationen,
+können ohne Taktlinien notiert werden, siehe hierzu
+@ref{Unmetered music}.
+
+@end itemize
+
+
+@seealso
+Notationsreferenz:
+@ref{Note names in other languages},
+@ref{Key signature},
+@ref{Manual beams}.
+
+Schnipsel:
+@rlsr{World music}.
@node Arabic note names
@unnumberedsubsubsec Arabic note names
-@untranslated
+@cindex arabische Notenbezeichnungen
+@cindex Notenbezeichnungen, arabisch
+
+An der arabischen Tradition orientierte Notenbezeichnungen können sehr
+land sein und eignen sich daher nicht gut für die Notation von Musik.
+Sie werden nicht benutzt. Englische Notenbezeichnungen hingegen sind
+in der arabischen Musikerziehung recht unbekannt, weshalb italienische
+Notenbezeichnungen (@code{do, re, mi, fa, sol, la, si}) eingesetzt
+werden. Modifikatoren (Versetzungszeichen) können auch benutzt werden,
+wie gezeigt in @ref{Note names in other languages}.
+
+Hier ein Beispiel der arabischen @notation{rast}-Tonleiter:
+
+@lilypond[quote,verbatim]
+\include "arabic.ly"
+\relative do' {
+ do re misb fa sol la sisb do sisb la sol fa misb re do
+}
+@end lilypond
+
+@cindex arabisches Halb-B Versetzungszeichen
+@cindex Halb-B-Versetzungszeichen, arabische Musik
+
+Das Symbol für das Halb-B sieht anders aus als das Symbol, was
+üblicherweise in arabischer Notation benutzt wird. Das
+@code{\dwn}-Symbol, das in der Datei @code{arabic.ly} definiert
+ist, kann als ein Workaround eingesetzt werden, wenn es notwendig
+ist, das arabische Symbol zu benutzen. Das Aussehen des
+Halb-Bs in den Vorzeichen kann mit dieser methode nicht verändert
+werden.
+
+@lilypond[quote,verbatim]
+\include "arabic.ly"
+\relative do' {
+ \set Staff.extraNatural = ##f
+ dod dob dosd \dwn dob dobsb dodsd do do
+}
+@end lilypond
+
+@seealso
+Notationsreferenz:
+@ref{Note names in other languages}.
+
+Schnipsel:
+@rlsr{World music}.
+
@node Arabic key signatures
@unnumberedsubsubsec Arabic key signatures
-@untranslated
+@cindex arabische Tonarten
+@cindex arabische Vorzeichen
+
+Neben den westlichen Dur- und Moll-Tonarten sind folgende
+Tonarten in @code{arabic.ly} definiert: @notation{bayati},
+@notation{rast}, @notation{sikah}, @notation{iraq} und
+@notation{kurd}. Diese Tonarten definieren eine kleine
+Gruppe von Maqams, die weitverbreitet sind.
+
+Ein Maqam kann die Tonart der Gruppe benutzen, zu der er gehört,
+oder die einer benachbarten Gruppe. Zusätzlich können verschiedene
+Versetzungszeichen in den Noten markiert werden.
+
+Um also etwa die Tonart des Maqams @qq{muhayer} folgendermaßen
+notiert:
+
+@example
+\key re \bayati
+@end example
+
+@var{re} ist die Tonhöhe für den @qq{muhayer}-Maqam und @var{bayati}
+ist die Bezeichnung des Basismaqams der Gruppe.
+
+Während die Vorzeichen eine Gruppe anzeigen, wird meistens der
+eigentliche Maqam im Titel definiert. In diesem Beispiel müsste
+also der @qq{muhayer}-Maqam im Titel erscheinen.
+
+Andere Maqams derselben Bayati-Gruppe, wie in der Tabelle unten
+gezeigt ((bayati, hussaini, saba und ushaq) können auf die gleiche
+Weise notiert werden. Sie sind alle Variationen des
+Grundmaqams Bayati. Sie unterscheiden sich üblicherweise vom
+grundlegenden Maqam in ihrem oberen Tetrachord oder in bestimmten
+Einzelheiten, die aber nicht ihre eigentliche Qualität verändern.
+
+Der andere Maqam der gleichen Gruppe (Nawa) ist mit bayati durch
+eine Modulation verwandt, deren Grundton in der Tabelle angezeigt
+wird, wenn es sich um einen Maqam handelt, der eine Modulation
+eines anderen Maqams darstellt. Nawa kann folgenderweise
+notiert werden:
+
+@example
+\key sol \bayati
+@end example
+
+In der arabischen Musik ist ein Begriff wie bayati, der eine
+Maqam-Gruppe bezeichnet, gleichzeitig auch selber ein Maqam,
+meistens der häufigste dieser Gruppe.
+
+Hier ist eine Möglichkeit, Maqams zu gruppieren, womit die
+häufigsten Maqams bestimmten Vorzeichen zugeordnet werden:
+
+@multitable @columnfractions 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.6
+@headitem Maqam-Gruppe
+ @tab Vorzeichen (@code{\key})
+ @tab Finalis
+ @tab Andere Maqams der Gruppe (Finalis)
+@item ajam
+ @tab major
+ @tab sib
+ @tab jaharka (fa)
+@item bayati
+ @tab bayati
+ @tab re
+ @tab hussaini, muhayer, saba, ushaq, nawa (sol)
+@item hijaz
+ @tab kurd
+ @tab re
+ @tab shahnaz, shad arban (sol), hijazkar (do)
+@item iraq
+ @tab iraq
+ @tab sisb
+ @tab -
+@item kurd
+ @tab kurd
+ @tab re
+ @tab hijazkar kurd (do)
+@item nahawand
+ @tab minor
+ @tab do
+ @tab busalik (re), farah faza (sol)
+@item nakriz
+ @tab minor
+ @tab do
+ @tab nawa athar, hisar (re)
+@item rast
+ @tab rast
+ @tab do
+ @tab mahur, yakah (sol)
+@item sikah
+ @tab sikah
+ @tab misb
+ @tab huzam
+@end multitable
+
+@snippets
+
+@lilypondfile[verbatim,lilyquote,texidoc,doctitle]
+{non-traditional-key-signatures.ly}
+
+@seealso
+Notationsreferenz:
+@ref{Key signature}.
+
+Handbuch zum Lernen:
+@rlearning{Accidentals and key signatures}.
+
+Referenz der Interna:
+@rinternals{KeySignature}.
+
+Schnipsel:
+@rlsr{World music},
+@rlsr{Pitches}.
@node Arabic time signatures
@unnumberedsubsubsec Arabic time signatures
-@untranslated
+@cindex Arabische Taktarten
+@cindex Taktarten, arabisch
+@cindex Semai-Form
+@cindex taqasim
+
+Einige klassische Formen der arabischen und türkischen Musik
+wie etwa @notation{Semai} haben ungewöhnliche Taktarten wie
+etwa 10/8. Das kann dazu führen, dass die automatische
+Bebalkung der Noten nicht zu dem Ergebnis kommt, welches in
+der üblichen Notation dieser Musik eingesetzt wird. Die Noten
+werden nicht anhand einer Taktzeit, sondern anhand von Kriterien
+gruppiert, die man schwer mit einer automatischen Balkenfunktion
+erfassen kann. Das kann umgangen werden, indem die automatische
+Bebalkung ausgeschaltet wird und die Balken explizit gesetzt werden.
+Auch wenn es nicht darauf ankommen sollte, eine schon notierte
+Musik nachzuahmen, ist es in vielen Fällen dennoch erforderlich,
+die Bebalkung anzupassen und/oder zusammengesetzte Taktarten
+zu benutzen.
+
+@snippets
+
+@lilypondfile[verbatim,lilyquote,texidoc,doctitle]
+{compound-time-signatures.ly}
+
+@lilypondfile[verbatim,lilyquote,texidoc,doctitle]
+{arabic-improvisation.ly}
+
+
+@seealso
+Notationsreferenz:
+@ref{Manual beams},
+@ref{Automatic beams},
+@ref{Unmetered music},
+@ref{Automatic accidentals},
+@ref{Setting automatic beam behavior},
+@ref{Time signature}.
+
+Schnipsel:
+@rlsr{World music}.
@node Arabic music example
@unnumberedsubsubsec Arabic music example
-@untranslated
+@cindex Beispiel der arabischen Musik
+@cindex arabische Musik, Beispiel
+@cindex Vorlage, arabische Musik
+
+Hier eine Vorlage, welche den Beginn eines türkischen Semai
+benutzt, der in der arabischen Musikerziehung oft herangezogen
+wird, um Besonderheiten der arabischen Musiknotation, wie
+etwa Zwischenintervalle und ungewöhnliche Modi, zu illustrieren.
+
+@lilypond[quote,verbatim]
+\include "arabic.ly"
+\score {
+ \relative re' {
+ \set Staff.extraNatural = ##f
+ \set Staff.autoBeaming = ##f
+ \key re \bayati
+ \time 10/8
+
+ re4 re'8 re16 [misb re do] sisb [la sisb do] re4 r8
+ re16 [misb do re] sisb [do] la [sisb sol8] la [sisb] do [re] misb
+ fa4 fa16 [misb] misb8. [re16] re8 [misb] re [do] sisb
+ do4 sisb8 misb16 [re do sisb] la [do sisb la] la4 r8
+ }
+ \header {
+ title = "Semai Muhayer"
+ composer = "Jamil Bek"
+ }
+}
+@end lilypond
+
+
+@seealso
+Schnipsel:
+@rlsr{World music}
@node Further reading
@unnumberedsubsubsec Further reading
-@untranslated
+@enumerate
+
+@item
+The Music of the Arabs von Habib Hassan Touma (Amadeus Press, 1996)
+enthält eine Beschreibung von Maqams und Methoden zu ihrer
+Gruppierung.
+
+Es gibt auch einige Internetseiten, die Maqams erklären und
+teilweise auch Klangdateien zur Verfügung stellen:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+@uref{http://www.maqamworld.com/}
+@item
+@uref{http://www.turath.org/}
+@end itemize
+
+Die Maqam-Gruppierungen unterscheiden sich in einigen Details, auch
+wenn die allgemeinen Kriterien weithin anerkannt sind:
+gemeinsame untere Tetrachorde sowie Modulation.
+@item
+Es gibt keine Übereinstimmung darüber, wie die Vorzeichen für
+bestimmte Maqams angegeben werden sollen. Oft wird eine
+Vorzeichenart für eine ganze Maqam-Gruppe verwendet, anstatt
+dass jeder Maqam eigene Vorzeichen hätte.
+Oud-Lehrbücher folgender Autoren enthalten Beispiele vor
+allem türkischer und arabischer Kompositionen:
-@c -- SKELETON FILE --
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+Charbel Rouhana
+@item
+George Farah
+@item
+Ibrahim Ali Darwish Al-masri
+@end itemize
+@end enumerate
- <p><i>Actualizado en Tue Dec 9 09:40:49 UTC 2008
+ <p><i>Actualizado en Sat Dec 20 11:59:00 UTC 2008
</i></p>
<html>
<!-- This page is automatically generated by translation-status.py from
<td>pre-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>4 Trucar la salida<br>(14581)</td>
+ <td>4 Trucar la salida<br>(14647)</td>
<td>Francisco Vila</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">sí</span></td>
<td>pre-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>4 @command{lilypond-book}: integrar texto y música<br>(3185)</td>
+ <td>4 @command{lilypond-book}: integrar texto y música<br>(3248)</td>
<td>Francisco Vila</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">sí</span></td>
<td>pre-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>1.1 Alturas<br>(3086)</td>
+ <td>1.1 Alturas<br>(3123)</td>
<td>Francisco Vila</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">sí</span></td>
<td>pre-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>1.7 Anotaciones editoriales<br>(906)</td>
+ <td>1.7 Anotaciones editoriales<br>(895)</td>
<td>Francisco Vila</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">sí</span></td>
<td>pre-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>2.2 Teclados y otros instrumentos de varios pentagramas<br>(725)</td>
+ <td>2.2 Teclados y otros instrumentos de varios pentagramas<br>(744)</td>
<td>Francisco Vila</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">sí</span></td>
<td>pre-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>2.4 Instrumentos de cuerda con trastes<br>(1759)</td>
+ <td>2.4 Instrumentos de cuerda con trastes<br>(1830)</td>
<td>Francisco Vila</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">sí</span></td>
<td>pre-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>2.7 Notación de acordes<br>(1333)</td>
+ <td>2.7 Notación de acordes<br>(1398)</td>
<td>Francisco Vila</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">sí</span></td>
<td>pre-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>4 Problemas de espaciado<br>(8444)</td>
+ <td>4 Problemas de espaciado<br>(8451)</td>
<td>Francisco Vila</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">sí</span></td>
<td>pre-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>B Tablas del manual sobre notación<br>(1155)</td>
+ <td>B Tablas del manual sobre notación<br>(1190)</td>
<td>Francisco Vila</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">sí</span></td>
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: es -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond.tely
@ignore
-Translation of GIT committish: 17d84cfa9ddb152b05d1e17ab72109fb4eefa684
+Translation of GIT committish: bc4543c30c67f02dadc392880f27d4581e2d7681
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: es -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 17d84cfa9ddb152b05d1e17ab72109fb4eefa684
+ Translation of GIT committish: bc4543c30c67f02dadc392880f27d4581e2d7681
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@seealso
Referencia de la notación:
-@ref{Common chord modifiers}.
+@ref{Common chord modifiers},
+@ref{Extended and altered chords}.
Fragmentos de código:
@rlsr{Chords}.
+@knownissues
+Sólo se puede usar un modificador por cada acorde, normalmente sobre
+la nota más aguda del mismo. Los acordes con maś de un modificador se
+analizan sin producir errores ni advertencias, pero el resultado es
+impredecible. Los acordes que no se pueden conseguir con un solo
+modificador se deben alterar en sus notas individuales como se
+describe en @ref{Extended and altered chords}.
@node Extended and altered chords
@unnumberedsubsubsec Extended and altered chords
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: es -*-
@c This file is included from notation.itely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 17d84cfa9ddb152b05d1e17ab72109fb4eefa684
+ Translation of GIT committish: 289a8244cb39275e313ddad57fe394da7a21c113
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@cindex selección del tamaño de la fuente tipográfica (de notación)
@cindex notación, tamaño de la fuente
@cindex notas, cabezas de
+
@funindex fontSize
@funindex font-size
@funindex magstep
@cindex estándar, tamaño de la tipografía (de notación)
@cindex fuente tipográfica (de notación), tamaño estándar de
+
@funindex font-interface
@funindex font-size
pentagrama de 20 puntos, se selecciona una fuente de 10 puntos.
La propiedad @code{font-size} sólo se puede establecer en objetos
-gráficos que utilicesn fuentes tipográficas. Éstos son los que
+gráficos que utilicen fuentes tipográficas. Éstos son los que
contemplan el interfaz de presentación @code{font-interface}.
@predefined
-@funindex \teeny
@code{\teeny} (enano),
-@funindex \tiny
@code{\tiny} (muy pequeño),
-@funindex \small
@code{\small} (pequeño),
-@funindex \normalsize
@code{\normalsize} (normal),
-@funindex \large
@code{\large} (grande),
-@funindex \huge
@code{\huge} (enorme).
@endpredefined
@cindex digitación
@cindex cambio de dedo
-@funindex font-interface
-@funindex font-size
+
+@funindex \finger
+@funindex finger
Las instrucciones de digitación se pueden introducir usando
@var{nota}-@var{dígito}:
@end lilypond
@cindex thumb-script
+
@funindex \thumb
@funindex thumb
@cindex notas ocultas
@cindex notas invisibles
@cindex notas transparentes
+
@funindex \hideNotes
@funindex hideNotes
@funindex \unHideNotes
@cindex coloreados, objetos
@cindex colores
-@cindex colorear objects
+@cindex colorear objetos
+@cindex objetos, colorear
@cindex coloreadas, notas
@cindex colorear notas
@cindex notas coloreadas
@cindex x11-color
@cindex colores de x11
@cindex with-color
+
@funindex color
@funindex \with-color
@funindex with-color
@cindex rgb-color
@cindex color rgb
@cindex rgb, color
+
@funindex rgb-color
Se pueden especificar colores RGB exactos utilizando la función de
@cindex coloreadas, notas de acorde
@cindex notas coloreadas en acordes
@cindex color en acordes
+
@funindex x11-color
@knownissues
@cindex notas fantasma
@cindex notas entre paréntesis
@cindex paréntesis
+
@funindex \parenthesize
@funindex parenthesize
@rinternals{ParenthesesItem},
@rinternals{parentheses-interface}.
-
@knownissues
Al poner un acorde entre paréntesis, se encierra cada una de las notas
individuales entre paréntesis, en vez de un solo paréntesis grande
rodeando al acorde completo.
+
@node Stems
@unnumberedsubsubsec Stems
@cindex plica invisible
@cindex invisible, plica
+@funindex \stemUp
+@funindex stemUp
+@funindex \stemDown
+@funindex stemDown
+@funindex \stemNeutral
+@funindex stemNeutral
+
Cuando se encuentra con una nota, se crea automáticamente un objeto
@code{Stem} (plica). Para las redondas y los silencios, también se
crean pero se hacen invisibles.
-
@predefined
-@funindex \stemUp
@code{\stemUp},
-@funindex \stemDown
@code{\stemDown},
-@funindex \stemNeutral
@code{\stemNeutral}.
@endpredefined
-
@snippets
@cindex stem, direction
@cindex notación, explicación de
@cindex globo de ayuda
@cindex ayuda, globos de
+
@funindex \balloonGrobText
@funindex \balloonText
@funindex Balloon_engraver
@funindex balloonGrobText
@funindex balloonText
+@funindex \balloonLengthOn
+@funindex balloonLengthOn
+@funindex \balloonLengthOff
+@funindex balloonLengthOff
Los elementos de notación se pueden marcar y nombrar con la ayuda de
un cartel o globo de ayuda rectangular. El propósito principal de
@predefined
-@funindex balloonLengthOn
-@funindex \balloonLengthOn
@code{\balloonLengthOn},
-@funindex \balloonLengthOff
-@funindex balloonLengthOff
@code{\balloonLengthOff}.
@endpredefined
@cindex líneas de rejilla
@cindex vertical, línea, entre pentagramas
@cindex línea vertical entre pentagramas
+
@funindex Grid_point_engraver
@funindex Grid_line_span_engraver
@funindex gridInterval
@cindex fraseo, corchetes de
@cindex corchetes de fraseo
@cindex musicológico, análisis
+@cindex análisis musicológico
@cindex notas, corchetes de agrupación de
@cindex horizontal, corchete
@cindex corchete horizontal
+
@funindex Horizontal_bracket_engraver
@funindex \startGroup
@funindex startGroup
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: es -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 17d84cfa9ddb152b05d1e17ab72109fb4eefa684
+ Translation of GIT committish: ac8805d20e179145e3f3371032fe54156d84b0d0
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@end lilypond
Se pueden incluir digitaciones y cejillas en una cadena de marcado
-prolija @code{fret-diagram-verbose}.
+prolija @code{fret-diagram-verbose}. Es exclusiva del interfaz de
+fret-diagram-verbose la indicación @q{capo} que se puede colocar sobre
+el diagrama de posición. La indicación de capo es una barra gruesa
+que cubre todas las cuerdas. El traste que tiene el capo es el más
+bajo del diagrama de posición.
@c \override is necessary to make fingering visible
@lilypond[quote, verbatim]
@cindex personalizados, añadir diagramas de traste
@cindex diagramas de trastes personalizados, añadir
-Se pueden añadir diagramas de traste a la tabla de diagramas sFret
-diagrams can be added to the fret diagram table. Para añadir un
-diagrama debemos especificar el acorde del diagrama, la afinación
-utilizadathe tuning to be used y la cadena de definición escueta
-fret-diagram-terse del diagrama.
+Se pueden añadir diagramas de posiciones a la tabla de diagramas de
+posiciones. Para añadir un diagrama debemos especificar el acorde del
+diagrama, la afinación utilizada y una definición del diagrama. La
+definición del diagrama puede ser una cadena de definición escueta
+fret-diagram-terse o una lista de marcados prolija
+fret-diagram-verbose.
@lilypond[verbatim, ragged-right, quote]
\include "predefined-guitar-fretboards.ly"
de formas de acorde. Las formas de acorde son diagramas de traste que
se pueden desplazar por el mástil para dar acordes distintos. Se
pueden añadir formas de acorde a la lista interna y luego usarlas para
-definir diagramas de traste predefinidos.
+definir diagramas de traste predefinidos. Como los diagramas de
+posiciones, las formas de acorde se pueden introducir como cadenas
+escuetas fret-diagram-terse o como listas de marcado prolijas
+fret-diagram-verbose.
@lilypond[verbatim, ragged-right, quote]
\include "predefined-guitar-fretboards.ly"
\storePredefinedDiagram \chordmode {f'}
#guitar-tuning
- #(chord-shape 'powerf guitar-tuning)
+ #(chord-shape 'powerf guitar-tuning)
\storePredefinedDiagram \chordmode {g'}
#guitar-tuning
#(offset-fret 2 (chord-shape 'powerf guitar-tuning))
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: es -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond-learning.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: e2fedc46142bc323d48e696848327c6c0e4c9ede
+ Translation of GIT committish: bc4543c30c67f02dadc392880f27d4581e2d7681
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: es -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 17d84cfa9ddb152b05d1e17ab72109fb4eefa684
+ Translation of GIT committish: bc4543c30c67f02dadc392880f27d4581e2d7681
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: es -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: d5bd12a5775832e81000fb901ad65283a152eaa4
+ Translation of GIT committish: 93485c0ecbda3b3e8fc7232f86f689e68f9ebd51
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@subsection Common notation for keyboards
Esta sección trata aspectos de notación que pueden aparecer en casi
-todos los instrumentos que tengan muchas cuerdas.
+todos los instrumentos de teclado.
@menu
* References for keyboards::
@end itemize
+@c @snippets
+@c @lilypondfile[verbatim,lilyquote,texidoc,doctitle]
+@c {forcing-visibility-of-systems-with-multi-bar-rests-when-using-\RemoveEmptyStaffContext.ly}
+@c http://lsr.dsi.unimi.it/LSR/Item?u=1&id=312
@seealso
Manual de aprendizaje:
Si se necesita más control sobre los pentagramas individuales, se
pueden crear manualmente con los nombres @code{"up"} y @code{"down"}.
Entonces, la instrucción @code{\autochange} alternará su voz entre los
-pentagramas existentes. Por ejemplo, esto es necesario para colocar
-una armadura de tonalidad en el pentagrama inferior:
+pentagramas existentes.
-@lilypond[quote,verbatim]
+@warning{Si se crean los pentagramas manualmente, @emph{se deben}
+llamar @code{"up"} y @code{"down"} (en inglés).}
+
+Por ejemplo, esto es necesario para colocar una armadura de tonalidad
+en el pentagrama inferior:
+
+@c Keep Ly needed, otherwise 'up' and 'down' get incorrectly translated in verbatim output
+@c KEEP LY
+@lilypond[quote,verbatim,nogettext]
\new PianoStaff <<
\new Staff = "up" {
- \new Voice = "melOne" {
+ \new Voice = "melodiaUno" {
\key g \major
\autochange \relative c' {
g8 b a c b d c e
@node Harp
@subsection Harp
+Esta sección trata sobre asuntos de notación específicos del arpa.
+
@menu
-* Harp notation::
+* References for harps::
* Harp pedals::
@end menu
-@node Harp notation
-@unnumberedsubsubsec Harp notation
+@node References for harps
+@unnumberedsubsubsec References for harps
+@cindex harps
+@cindex bisbiglando
-Continuará...
+Ciertas características comunes de la música de arpa se estudian en
+otras partes de la documentación:
-@ignore
-Some possibilities:
-- glissandi
-- tremolo (for bisbigliando)
-- natural harmonics
-- directional arpeggio and non-arpeggio
-- workaroung for keeping both staves visible in an orchestral
- score,
-http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/lilypond-user/2007-08/msg00386.html
-and http://lsr.dsi.unimi.it/LSR/Item?u=1&id=312
-
-An LSR snippet could be used to demonstrate the main items; in the
-case of glissandi, it would be desirable to have a demonstration
-of different styles.
-@end ignore
+@itemize
+
+@item El glissando es la técnica más característica del arpa,
+@ref{Glissando}.
+
+@item El @notation{bisbigliando} se escribe como un trémolo, @ref{Tremolo
+repeats}
+
+@item Los armónicos naturales se estudian bajo el epígrafe @ref{Harmonics}.
+
+@item Para los arpegios dirigidos y los no arpegios, véase @ref{Arpeggio}.
+
+@end itemize
+
+@seealso
+Referencia de la notación:
+@ruser{Tremolo repeats},
+@ruser{Glissando},
+@ruser{Arpeggio},
+@ruser{Harmonics}.
@node Harp pedals
@unnumberedsubsubsec Harp pedals
@seealso
Referencia de la notación:
-@ruser{Text scripts}.
+@ruser{Text scripts},
+@ruser{Instrument Specific Markup}.
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: es -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond-program.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: e2fedc46142bc323d48e696848327c6c0e4c9ede
+ Translation of GIT committish: 03baa9b14ef082fc7d651649a4081f326be304e1
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
f2 e
@end example
+@noindent
+Si queremos traducir los comentarios y los nombres de variable en la
+salida literal pero no en el código fuente, podemos establecer el
+valor de la variable de entorno @code{LYDOC_LOCALEDIR} a la ruta de un
+directorio; este directorio debe contener un árbol de catálogos de
+mensajes @file{.mo} con @code{lilypond-doc} como dominio.
+
@item addversion
(Sólo para la salida de Texinfo.) Anteponer la línea @code{\version
@@w@{"@@version@{@}"@}} a la salida de @code{verbatim}.
referida al procesado de @code{texidoc} con idiomas localizados se
aplica a @code{doctitle}.
+@item nogettext
+(Sólo para la salida de Texinfo.) No traducir los comentarios y
+nombres de variable en el fragmento de código literal citado.
+
@item printfilename
Si un archivo de entrada de LilyPond se incluye con
@code{\lilypondfile}, imprimir el nombre del archivo inmediatamente
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: es -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 0646758d26f727fc27fc13a87df2362388909e5d
+ Translation of GIT committish: bc4543c30c67f02dadc392880f27d4581e2d7681
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@tab
Tríada disminuida y séptima menor
@tab
-@code{dim5m7}
+@code{m7.5-}
@tab
@lilypond[line-width=3\cm,noragged-right, notime]
\chordmode {
@tab
Tríada menor con séptima mayor
@tab
-@code{7m5}
+@code{maj7.5-}
@tab
@lilypond[line-width=3\cm,noragged-right, notime]
\chordmode {
- c1:7m5
+ c1:maj7.5-
}
@end lilypond
@end lilypond
@item
-Novena mayor
+Mayor con novena
@tab
-HACER
+Séptima mayor y novena mayor
@tab
@code{maj9}
@tab
@item
Menor con novena
@tab
-HACER
+Séptima menor y novena mayor
@tab
@code{m9}
@tab
@item
Oncena mayor
@tab
-HACER
+Novena mayor y oncena justa
@tab
@code{maj11}
@tab
@item
Menor con oncena
@tab
-HACER
+Novena menor y oncena justa
@tab
@code{m11}
@tab
}
@end lilypond
+@item
+Trecena dominante
+@tab
+Novena dominante y trecena mayor
+@tab
+@code{13}
+@tab
+@lilypond[line-width=3\cm,noragged-right, notime]
+\chordmode {
+ c1:13
+}
+@end lilypond
+
@item
Trecena dominante
@tab
@item
Mayor con trecena
@tab
-HACER
+Oncena mayor y trecena mayor
@tab
@code{maj13.11}
@tab
@item
Menor con trecena
@tab
-HACER
+Oncena menor y trecena mayor
@tab
@code{m13.11}
@tab
@item
Segunda suspendida
@tab
-HACER
+Segunda mayor y quinta justa
@tab
@code{sus2}
@tab
@item
Cuarta suspendida
@tab
-HACER
+Cuarta justa y quinta justa
@tab
@code{sus4}
@tab
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: es -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 17d84cfa9ddb152b05d1e17ab72109fb4eefa684
+ Translation of GIT committish: bc4543c30c67f02dadc392880f27d4581e2d7681
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
-@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; -*-
+@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: es -*-
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 17d84cfa9ddb152b05d1e17ab72109fb4eefa684
+ Translation of GIT committish: bc4543c30c67f02dadc392880f27d4581e2d7681
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@cindex alturas
@cindex absoluta
@cindex absoluta, especificación, de la octava
+@cindex octava, especificación absoluta
@cindex absoluta, introducción, de la octava
+@cindex octava, introducción absoluta
El nombre de una nota se especifica usando las letras minúsculas de la
@code{a} a la @code{g}. Las notas cuyos nombres van desde @code{c}
@end lilypond
@cindex octava, marca de cambio de
+
@funindex '
@funindex ,
@cindex relativo
@cindex relativas, especificación de octavas
+@cindex octava, introducción relativa
+@cindex relativa, especificación de la octava
+@cindex ocatva, especificación relativa
+
+@funindex relative
@funindex \relative
Cuando las octavas se especifican en modo absoluto, es fácil poner por
}
@end lilypond
+@cindex acordes e introducción relativa de la octava
+@cindex relativa, introducción de la octava, y acordes
Si el elemento anterior es un acorde, la primera nota del acorde se
utiliza para determinar la primera nota del siguiente acorde. Dentro
}
@end lilypond
-
@seealso
Glosario musical:
@rglos{fifth},
Referencia de funcionamiento interno:
@rinternals{RelativeOctaveMusic}.
-
@cindex relativo, modo, transposición y
@cindex transposición y modo relativo
+
@funindex \transpose
+@funindex transpose
@funindex \chordmode
+@funindex chordmode
@funindex \relative
+@funindex relative
@knownissues
-
La conversión relativa no afecta a las secciones @code{\transpose},
@code{\chordmode} o @code{\relative} en su argumento. Para usar el
modo relativo dentro de música transportada, se debe escribir un
@cindex notas, nombres holandeses de
@cindex notas, nombres predeterminados
+@cindex predeterminados, nombres de nota
@cindex sostenido
@cindex bemol
@cindex doble sostenido
@end lilypond
@cindex cuartos de tono
-@cindex semi-bemoles, semi-sostenidos
+@cindex semi-bemoles
+@cindex semi-sostenidos
Se pueden escribir medios bemoles y los medios sostenidos; a
continuación presentamos una serie de DOs cada vez más agudos:
@cindex alteración de precaución
@cindex alteración con paréntesis
@cindex recordatoria, alteración
-@funindex ?
@cindex precaución, alteración de
@cindex paréntesis, alteración con
+
+@funindex ?
@funindex !
Normalmente las alteraciones accidentales se imprimen automáticamente,
@cindex octava, comprobación de
@cindex octava, corrección de
@cindex control, alturas de
+
@funindex =
@funindex \octaveCheck
+@funindex octaveCheck
@funindex controlpitch
En el modo relativo, es fácil olvidar una marca de cambio de octava.
@cindex transposición de notas
@cindex alturas, transporte de
@cindex notas, transporte de
+
@funindex \transpose
+@funindex transpose
Una expresión musical se puede transportar mediante @code{\transpose}.
La sintaxis es
}
@end lilypond
-@cindex transpositores, instrumentos
-@cindex instrumentos transpositores
-
Si una particella escrita en Do (@notation{afinación de concierto}
normal) se debe tocar con un clarinete en La (para el que un La se
escribe como un Do, y que suena una tercera menor por debajo de lo que
Referencia de funcionamiento interno:
@rinternals{TransposedMusic}.
-
@funindex \transpose
+@funindex transpose
@funindex \chordmode
+@funindex chordmode
@funindex \relative
+@funindex relative
@knownissues
@node Clef
@unnumberedsubsubsec Clef
-@funindex \clef
+
@cindex Sol, clave de
@cindex Do, clave de
@cindex Fa, clave de
@cindex clave de barítono
@cindex clave de contrabajo
+@funindex \clef
+@funindex clef
+
La clave se establece con la instrucción @code{\clef}
@var{nombre_de_clave}. En todos los ejemplos se muestra el Do
central.
@cindex clave transpositora
@cindex octava, transposición de
@cindex coral, clave de tenor
+@cindex tenor coral, clave
Al añadir @code{_8} o @code{^8} al nombre de la clave, la clave se
transpone una octava hacia abajo o hacia arriba, respectivamente, y
@unnumberedsubsubsec Key signature
@cindex Armadura de la tonalidad
+
@funindex \key
+@funindex key
Las alteraciones accidentales y las armaduras son una frecuente causa de confusión para los nuevos usuarios,
porque las notas sin alteración pueden llevar signos de becuadro en función de la armadura.
@end example
@funindex \major
+@funindex major
@funindex \minor
+@funindex minor
@funindex \ionian
+@funindex ionian
@funindex \locrian
+@funindex locrian
@funindex \aeolian
+@funindex aeolian
@funindex \mixolydian
+@funindex mixolydian
@funindex \lydian
+@funindex lydian
@funindex \phrygian
+@funindex phrygian
@funindex \dorian
+@funindex dorian
+
@cindex modos eclesiásticos
@cindex modos
-@cindex major
-@cindex minor
-@cindex ionian
-@cindex locrian
-@cindex aeolian
-@cindex mixolydian
-@cindex lydian
-@cindex phrygian
-@cindex dorian
@cindex mayor, modo
@cindex menor, modo
@cindex eonio, modo
@cindex 15ma
@cindex 8va
@cindex octavación
+
@funindex set-octavation
+@funindex \ottava
+@funindex ottava
Los @notation{corchetes de Ottava} introducen un trasporte adicional
de una octava para el pentagrama.
@cindex transpositor, instrumento
@cindex MIDI
@cindex MIDI, transposición
+
@funindex \transposition
+@funindex transposition
Al tipografiar partituras donde participan instrumentos
transpositores, ciertas partes se pueden tipografiar en un tono
@cindex alteraciones, estilo de las
@cindex predeterminado, estilo de las alteraciones
@cindex alteraciones, estilo predeterminado de las
+
@funindex set-accidental-style
@funindex voice
+@funindex default
Existen muchas convenciones distintas sobre la forma de tipografiar
las alteraciones. LilyPond proporciona una función para especificar
Están contemplados los siguientes estilos de alteración. Para dar una
muestra de cada uno de los estilos, utilizamos el ejemplo siguiente:
-@funindex default
-
@lilypond[verbatim,quote]
musicA = {
<<
@item default (predeterminado)
@cindex alteraciones, estilo predeterminado
+
@funindex default
Es el comportamiento de composición tipográfica predeterminado.
@cindex moderno, estilo de alteraciones
@cindex alteraciones, estilo, moderno-precaución
@cindex moderno-precaución, estilo de alteraciones
+
@funindex voice
El comportamiento normal es recordar las alteraciones accidentales al
@cindex alteraciones, estilo moderno
@cindex moderno, alteraciones de estilo
+
@funindex modern
Esta regla corresponde a la práctica común del s. XX. Imprime las
@cindex alteraciones, estilo moderno de precaución
@cindex moderno, alteraciones de estilo
@cindex moderno de precaución, alteraciones de estilo
+
@funindex modern-cautionary
Esta regla es similar a @code{modern}, pero las alteraciones
@cindex moderno, alteraciones de estilo
@cindex voces, alteraciones en varias
@cindex alteración, estilo moderno de
+
@funindex modern-voice
Esta regla se usa para que puedan leer las alteraciones en varias
@cindex alteración, estilo de voz de precaución moderno
@cindex alteración de voz de precaución moderno, estilo de
@cindex alteración, moderno de precaución, voz, estilo de
+
@funindex modern-voice-cautionary
Esta regla es la misma que @code{modern-voice}, pero con las
@cindex piano, alteraciones de
@cindex alteraciones de piano
@cindex piano, estilo de alteraciones de
+
@funindex piano
Esta regla refleja la práctica del s.XX para la notación de piano. Su
@item piano-cautionary (piano, de precaución)
-@funindex piano-cautionary
@cindex alteraciones, piano de precaución, estilo de
@cindex alteraciones, piano de precaución
@cindex precaución, estilo de alteraciones, piano
@cindex piano de precaución, estilo de alteraciones
@cindex piano de precaución, alteraciones
+@funindex piano-cautionary
+
Igual que @code{#(set-accidental-style 'piano)} pero con las
alteraciones añadidas compuestas como de precaución.
@end lilypond
@item neo-modern
-@funindex neo-modern
@cindex neo-moderno, estilo de alteraciones
@cindex alteraciones, estilo de, neo-moderno
+@funindex neo-modern
+
Esta regla reproduce una práctica común en la música contemporánea:
las alteraciones accidentales se imprimen como en @code{modern}, pero
se vuelven a imprimir si aparece la misma nota otra vez en el mismo
@item neo-modern-cautionary
-@funindex neo-modern-cautionary
@cindex neo-moderno de precaución, estilo de alteraciones
@cindex alteraciones, estilo, neo-moderno de precaución
+@funindex neo-modern-cautionary
+
Esta regla es similar a @code{neo-modern}, pero las alteraciones
adicionales se imprimen como alteraciones de precaución.
@item dodecaphonic
-@funindex dodecaphonic
@cindex dodecafónico, estilo de alteraciones
@cindex alteraciones, estilo, dodecafónico
+@funindex dodecaphonic
+
Esta regla refleja una práctica introducida por los compositores de
principios del s.XX, en un intento de abolir la jerarquía entre notas
naturales y alteradas. Con este estilo, @emph{todas} las notas llevan
@item teaching (enseñanza)
-@funindex teaching
@cindex teaching (enzeñanza), estilo de alteraciones
@cindex alteraciones, estilo teaching (enseñanza)
+@funindex teaching
+
Esta regla está pensada para estudiantes, y hace más sencillo crear
hojas de escalas con alteraciones de precaución creadas
automáticamente. Las alteraciones se imprimen como en el estilo
@item no-reset (no restablecer)
-@funindex no-reset
@cindex alteraciones no restablecer, estilo de
@cindex no restablecer, estilo de alteraciones
+@funindex no-reset
+
Es el mismo que @code{default} pero con alteraciones que duran @q{para
siempre} y no sólo dentro del mismo compás:
@item forget (olvidar)
-@funindex forget
@cindex olvidar, estilo de alteraciones
@cindex alteración, estilo de, olvidar
+@funindex forget
+
Es lo opuesto a @code{no-reset}: Las alteraciones no se recuerdan en
absoluto: de aquí que todas las alteraciones se compongan
tipográficamente en relación a la armadura de la tonalidad, sin que
@cindex guitarra, cabezas de nota
@cindex nota, cabeza de, estilos
@cindex estilos de cabeza de nota
+
@funindex cross
Se puede modificar la cabeza de las notas:
@cindex nots, cabezas de, para precticar
@cindex simplificada, notación
+@funindex \easyHeadsOn
+@funindex easyHeadsOn
+@funindex \easyHeadsOff
+@funindex easyHeadsOff
+
Las cabezas @q{easy play} (fáciles de tocar) tienen el nombre de la
nota (en inglés) dentro de la cabeza. Se usa en la música para
principiantes.
@predefined
-@funindex \easyHeadsOn
@code{\easyHeadsOn},
-@funindex \easyHeadsOff
@code{\easyHeadsOff}.
@endpredefined
@cindex formas, notas con
@cindex Aiken, cabezas de nota con forma de
@cindex arpa sacra, cabezas de nota de
+
@funindex \key
+@funindex key
@funindex \aikenHeads
+@funindex aikenHeads
@funindex \sacredHarpHeads
+@funindex sacredHarpHeads
En la notación de cabezas con forma, la forma de la cabeza corresponde
a la función armónica de una nota dentro de la escala. Esta notación
@predefined
-@funindex \aikenHeads
@code{\aikenHeads},
-@funindex \sacredHarpHeads
@code{\sacredHarpHeads}.
@endpredefined
@cindex notas, cabezas de, improvisación
@cindex notas, cabezas de, barradas
+@funindex \improvisationOn
+@funindex improvisationOn
+@funindex \improvisationOff
+@funindex improvisationOff
+
La improvisación se denota a veces mediante cabezas de nota en forma
de barra inclinada, donde el ejecutante puede elegir cualquier nota
pero con el ritmo especificado. Estas cabezas de nota se crean así:
@predefined
-@funindex \improvisationOn
@code{\improvisationOn},
-@funindex \improvisationOff
@code{\improvisationOff}.
@endpredefined
@rinternals{Pitch_squash_engraver},
@rinternals{Voice},
@rinternals{RhythmicStaff}.
-
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: es -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: d5bd12a5775832e81000fb901ad65283a152eaa4
+ Translation of GIT committish: a665ef1bf16700359aa81ec649d3a500bfa72213
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
Si se añade el símbolo @code{'landscape} (apaisado) como argumento a
@code{set-default-paper-size}, las páginas se giran 90 grados y se
-establecen en consonancia un longitud mayor de las líneas.
+establece en consonancia una mayor longitud de las líneas.
@example
#(set-default-paper-size "a6" 'landscape)
@end example
-al establecer el tamaño del papel se ajustan un cierto número de
+Al establecer el tamaño del papel se ajustan un cierto número de
variables del @code{\paper}, tales como los márgenes. Para utilizar
un tamaño de página determinado con variables de @code{\paper}
alteradas, establezca el tamaño de página antes de dar valores a las
@item page-top-space
@funindex page-top-space
-Distancia desde la parte alte del área imprimible hasta el centro del
+Distancia desde la parte alta del área imprimible hasta el centro del
primer pentagrama. Esto sólo funciona para pentagramas con una
anchura vertical pequeña. Los pentagramas grandes se establecen con
la parte alta de su caja circundante alineada a la parte alta del área
@item auto-first-page-number
@funindex auto-first-page-number
-EL algoritmo de división de páginas está afectado por el hecho de que
+El algoritmo de división de páginas está afectado por el hecho de que
el número de la primera página sea par o impar. Si está establecido
al valor verdadero, el algoritmo de división de páginas decide si
comenzar con un número par o impar. Esto hace que el número de la
@funindex ragged-last
Si está establecido a un valor verdadero, el último sistema de la
-partitura no llenará la anchura de la línea. En su lugar, el últim
+partitura no llenará la anchura de la línea. En su lugar, el último
sistema termina en su longitud horizontal natural. Predeterminado:
@code{##f}.
@noindent
Esto establece el tamaño global predeterminado a una altura de
-pentagrama de 14pt y escala todas las tipografías de manera
-correspondiente.
+pentagrama de 14pt y escala todas las tipografías según corresponda.
Para establecer el tamaño del pentagrama de forma individual para cada
partitura, use
@funindex \layout
-Mientras que @code{\paper} conteine ajustes relativos al formato de
+Mientras que @code{\paper} contiene ajustes relativos al formato de
página del documento completo, @code{\layout} contiene ajustes para la
disposición específica de cada partitura.
Esto se puede evitar eliminando el grabador
@code{Forbid_line_break_engraver}. Observe que los saltos de línea
-forzados manualmente breaks se tienen que añadir en paralelo con la
-música.
+forzados manualmente se tienen que añadir en paralelo con la música.
@lilypond[quote,ragged-right,verbatim]
\new Voice \with {
@cindex espacio entre pentagramas
@cindex espacio dentro de los sistemas
-La altura de cad sistema se determina automáticamente. Para evitar
+La altura de cada sistema se determina automáticamente. Para evitar
que los pentagramas se superpongan unos encima de otros, se establecen
algunas distancias mínimas. Al modificarlas, podemos poner los
pentagramas más cerca unos de otros. Esto reduce el espacio que
debajo dándole el valor @code{(-6 . 4)}.
Después de que se han determinado los saltos de página, se reevalúa el
-espaciado vertical dentrod e cada sistema para llenar la página de
+espaciado vertical dentro de cada sistema para llenar la página de
forma más regular; si una página tiene más espacio de sobra, se
amplían los sistemas para poder llenar este espacio. La magnitud de
esta ampliación se puede configurar a través de la propiedad
@code{page-limit-inter-system-space} en el bloque @code{\paper}. La
variable del papel @code{page-limit-inter-system-space-factor}
determina en qué cantidad se puede incrementar el espacio: por
-ejemplo, el valor @code{1.3} sisgnifica que el espacio puede ser un
+ejemplo, el valor @code{1.3} significa que el espacio puede ser un
30% mayor que lo que sería en una página no justificada hasta abajo.
En el ejemplo siguiente, si el espacio entre los sistemas no estuviese
}
@end lilypond
-Aobserve que aquí asignamos dos valores distintos al atributo
+Observe que aquí asignamos dos valores distintos al atributo
@code{line-break-system-details} del grob
@code{NonMusicalPaperColumn}. Aunque el atributo alist de
@code{line-break-system-details} acepta muchos parámetros de espaciado
pentagrama de acuerdo a su prioridad @code{outside-staff-priority} (en
orden creciente). LilyPond toma los objetos fuera del pentagrama uno
a uno y los coloca de forma que no choquen con ningún objeto que ya
-haya sido colocado. Eesto es, si dos grobs fuera del pentagrama
+haya sido colocado. Esto es, si dos grobs fuera del pentagrama
compiten por el mismo espacio, el que tiene la prioridad
@code{outside-staff-priority} más baja se colocará más próximo al
pentagrama.
c^"This text is placed close to the previous text"
@end lilypond
-HACER: ¿este ejemplo ya no funciona?
-
-De forma predeterminada, los objetos fuera del pentagrama se sitúan
-sin tener en cuenta su distancia horizontal a partir de los grobs
-posicionados previamente. Esto puede llevar a situiaciones en las que
-los objetos se colocan muy próximos entre sí en el sentido horizontal.
-El establecimiento del relleno horizontal
+De forma predeterminada, los objetos fuera del pentagrama se colocan
+sólo para evitar una colisión horizontal con los grobs posicionados
+previamente. Esto puede llevar a situaciones en las que los objetos
+se colocan muy próximos entre sí en el sentido horizontal. El espacio
+vertical entre pentagramas se puede fijar también de manera que los
+objetos fuera del pentagrama se sitúen de forma intercalada. El
+establecimiento del relleno horizontal
@code{outside-staff-horizontal-padding} ocasiona que un objeto se
-desplace verticalmente para que tal situiación no ocurra.
+desplace verticalmente para que tal situación no ocurra.
@lilypond[quote,ragged-right,relative=2,fragment,verbatim]
% the markup is too close to the following note
-c2^"Text"
+c4^"Text"
+c4
c''2
% setting outside-staff-horizontal-padding fixes this
R1
\once \override TextScript #'outside-staff-horizontal-padding = #1
-c,,2^"Text"
+c,,4^"Text"
+c4
c''2
@end lilypond
Si siguiésemos el procedimiento anterior exactamente, entonces la
adición de una sola fusa a una partitura que usa corcheas y
-semicorcheas, aumentaría enormemente la anchuta de la partitura
+semicorcheas, aumentaría enormemente la anchura de la partitura
completa. La nota más breve ya no es la semicorchea, sino la fusa,
añadiendo así 1 ACB a cada una de las notas. Para evitarlo, la
duración más breve a efectos de espaciado no es la nota más breve de
Estas duraciones también se pueden personalizar. Si establecemos la
@code{common-shortest-duration} en @rinternals{SpacingSpanner},
entonces éste establece la duración base para el espaciado. La
-duración máxima para esta base (normalmente un a corchea), se fija a
+duración máxima para esta base (normalmente una corchea), se fija a
través de @code{base-shortest-duration}.
@funindex common-shortest-duration
@end lilypond
La blanca al princpio del compás y las notas rápidas de la segunda
-mitad del compás ocupan ahora igual cantidades iguales de espacio
+mitad del compás ocupan ahora cantidades iguales de espacio
horizontal. Podríamos colocar una línea de tiempo graduada o un
gráfico encima o debajo de este ejemplo.
Sería posible evitar los problemas de espaciado con las armaduras,
simplemente evitando tenerlas. Esta es una opción válida pues casi
todas las partituras proporcionales son música contemporánea. Lo
-mismo puede valer para las indicaciones de compás, espacialmente para
-las partituras que incluyen ula línea de tiempo graduada u otro
+mismo puede valer para las indicaciones de compás, especialmente para
+las partituras que incluyen una línea de tiempo graduada u otro
gráfico. Pero estas partituras son excepcionales y casi todas las
partituras proporcionales incluyen al menos unas pocas indicaciones de
compás. Las claves y las alteraciones son aún más esenciales.
@end lilypond
Las dos poartituras son proporcionales, pero el espaciado de la
-primera es muy suelto a causa del cmabio de clave. Sin embargo, el
+primera es muy suelto a causa del cambio de clave. Sin embargo, el
espaciado de la segunda partitura se mantiene estricto, porque
@code{strict-note-spacing} está activado. La activación de
@code{strict-note-spacing} hace que el ancho de las indicaciones de
@noindent
Todas las dimensiones de disposición se muestran en espacios de
pentagrama, independientemenre de las unidades especificadas en los
-bloques @code{\paper} o @code{\layout}. Por ejemmplo,
+bloques @code{\paper} o @code{\layout}. Por ejemplo,
@code{paper-height} tiene un valor de 59.75 espacios de pentagrama,
usando el tamaño predeterminado de pentagrama de 20 puntos, que
equivale a 148 milímetros, la altura de una hoja de papel @code{a6} en
Evitar (o reducir en número) los objetos que aumentan el tamaño
vertical de un sistema. Por ejemplo, las repeticiones de primera y
segunda vez (o repeticiones con finales alternativos) necesitan
-espacio adicional. Si estas repeticiones se reparten a lo lardo de
+espacio adicional. Si estas repeticiones se reparten a lo largo de
dos sistemas, ocupan más espacio que un sistema con las casillas de
repetición y otro sistema sin ellas. Por ejemplo, las indicaciones
dinámicas que se @q{salen} de un sistema se pueden acercar al
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: es -*-
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 17d84cfa9ddb152b05d1e17ab72109fb4eefa684
+ Translation of GIT committish: bc4543c30c67f02dadc392880f27d4581e2d7681
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: es -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: 17d84cfa9ddb152b05d1e17ab72109fb4eefa684
+ Translation of GIT committish: bc4543c30c67f02dadc392880f27d4581e2d7681
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@end lilypond
Observe que la sintaxis de @code{\tweak} no es igual que la de
-@code{\override}. Ni el contexto ni el objeto de
-presentación se deben especificar; de hecho, generaría un error
-hacerlo. Los dos están implícitos por el siguiente elemento del flujo
-de entrada. Así que la sintaxis genérica de la instrucción
-@code{\tweak} es, simplemente,
+@code{\override}. Ni el contexto ni el objeto de presentación se
+deben especificar; de hecho, generaría un error hacerlo. Los dos
+están implícitos por el siguiente elemento del flujo de entrada.
+Observe también que no debe haber un signo igual. Así que la sintaxis
+genérica de la instrucción @code{\tweak} es, simplemente,
@example
-\tweak #'@var{propiedad-de-presentación} = #@var{valor}
+\tweak #'@var{propiedad-de-presentación} #@var{valor}
@end example
Una instrucción @code{\tweak} también se puede usar para modificar
tediosas de escribir, y se tienen que escribir de forma absolutamente
correcta. Si las mismas sobreescrituras se van a utilizar muchas
veces, podría merecer la pena definir variables para guardarlas.
-Suponga que queremos realzar ciertas palabras de la letra de una
+
+Supongamos que queremos realzar ciertas palabras de la letra de una
canción imprimiéndolas en cursiva y negrita. Las instrucciones
@code{\italic} y @code{\bold} sólo funcionan dentro de la letra de las
-canciones si están incluidas dentro de un @code{\markup}, lo que las
-hace tediosas de escribir. ¿Podríamos, como alternativa, utilizar las
-instrucciones @code{\override} y @code{\revert}?
+canciones si están incluidas, junto con la palabra o palabras que se
+pretenden modificar, dentro de un @code{\markup}, lo que las hace
+tediosas de escribir. La necesidad de incluir las propias palabras
+impide que se puedan usar en variables simples. ¿Podríamos, como
+alternativa, utilizar las instrucciones @code{\override} y
+@code{\revert}?
@example
@code{\override Lyrics . LyricText #'font-shape = #'italic}
@end example
Estas instrucciones también serían extremadamente tediosas de escribir
-si hubiera muchas palabras que quisiéramos subrayar. Entonces, en vez
-de esto las definimos como dos variables, y las usamos de la siguiente
-forma, aunque normalmente quizá elegiríamos unos nombres de variable
+si hubiera muchas palabras que quisiéramos subrayar. Pero sí
+@emph{podemos} definirlas como dos variables y usarlas para delimitar
+las palabras que destacar. Otra ventaja de la utilización de
+variables para estas sobreescrituras es que ya no son necesarios los
+espacios que rodean al punto, puesto que no se interpretan
+directamente en el modo @code{\lyricmode}. He aquí un ejemplo de
+esto, aunque en la práctica quizá elegiríamos unos nombres de variable
más cortos para que fueran más rápidos de teclear:
@cindex LyricText, ejemplo de sobreescritura
@lilypond[quote,verbatim]
emphasize = {
- \override Lyrics . LyricText #'font-shape = #'italic
- \override Lyrics . LyricText #'font-series = #'bold
+ \override Lyrics.LyricText #'font-shape = #'italic
+ \override Lyrics.LyricText #'font-series = #'bold
}
normal = {
- \revert Lyrics . LyricText #'font-shape
- \revert Lyrics . LyricText #'font-series
+ \revert Lyrics.LyricText #'font-shape
+ \revert Lyrics.LyricText #'font-series
}
global = { \time 4/4 \partial 4 \key c \major}
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: es -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: d5bd12a5775832e81000fb901ad65283a152eaa4
+ Translation of GIT committish: bc4543c30c67f02dadc392880f27d4581e2d7681
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
- <p><i>Dernière mise à jour Tue Dec 9 09:40:49 UTC 2008
+ <p><i>Dernière mise à jour Sat Dec 20 11:59:00 UTC 2008
</i></p>
<html>
<!-- This page is automatically generated by translation-status.py from
Jean-Charles Malahieude</td>
<td>John Mandereau</td>
<td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">oui</span></td>
- <td><span style="background-color: #47ff24">partiellement</span></td>
+ <td><span style="background-color: #4efe25">partiellement</span></td>
<td>pré-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>4 Retouche de partition<br>(14581)</td>
+ <td>4 Retouche de partition<br>(14647)</td>
<td>Valentin Villenave<br>
Nicolas Klutchnikoff<br>
Damien Heurtebise</td>
<td>pré-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>4 @command{lilypond-book} : association musique-texte<br>(3185)</td>
+ <td>4 @command{lilypond-book} : association musique-texte<br>(3248)</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #d0f0f8">non</span></td>
<td>pré-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>1.1 Hauteurs<br>(3086)</td>
+ <td>1.1 Hauteurs<br>(3123)</td>
<td>Frédéric Chiasson</td>
<td>Valentin Villenave<br>
Jean-Charles Malahieude</td>
<td>pré-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>1.7 Notation éditoriale<br>(906)</td>
+ <td>1.7 Notation éditoriale<br>(895)</td>
<td>Jean-Charles Malahieude</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">oui</span></td>
<td>pré-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>2.2 Instruments utilisant des portées multiples<br>(725)</td>
+ <td>2.2 Instruments utilisant des portées multiples<br>(744)</td>
<td>Valentin Villenave</td>
<td>Jean-Charles Malahieude<br>
John Mandereau</td>
- <td><span style="background-color: #dfef77">partiellement (89 %)</span></td>
- <td><span style="background-color: #ff6d58">partiellement</span></td>
+ <td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">oui</span></td>
+ <td><span style="background-color: #1fff1f">oui</span></td>
<td>pré-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
<td>pré-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>2.4 Instruments à cordes frettées<br>(1759)</td>
+ <td>2.4 Instruments à cordes frettées<br>(1830)</td>
<td>Valentin Villenave</td>
<td>Jean-Charles Malahieude<br>
John Mandereau</td>
<td>pré-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>2.7 Notation des accords<br>(1333)</td>
+ <td>2.7 Notation des accords<br>(1398)</td>
<td>Valentin Villenave</td>
<td>Jean-Charles Malahieude<br>
John Mandereau</td>
- <td><span style="background-color: #dfef77">partiellement (64 %)</span></td>
+ <td><span style="background-color: #dfef77">partiellement (61 %)</span></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #ff6f57">partiellement</span></td>
<td>pré-GDP</td>
</tr>
<td>pré-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>4 Gestion de l'espace<br>(8444)</td>
+ <td>4 Gestion de l'espace<br>(8451)</td>
<td>Frédéric Chiasson<br>
Jean-Charles Malahieude</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #dfef77">partiellement (19 %)</span></td>
- <td><span style="background-color: #fff73e">partiellement</span></td>
+ <td><span style="background-color: #fff53e">partiellement</span></td>
<td>pré-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
<td>pré-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>B Tables du manuel de notation<br>(1155)</td>
+ <td>B Tables du manuel de notation<br>(1190)</td>
<td>Frédéric Chiasson<br>
Jean-Charles Malahieude</td>
<td></td>
<td><span style="background-color: #dfef77">partiellement (7 %)</span></td>
- <td><span style="background-color: #e8fe39">partiellement</span></td>
+ <td><span style="background-color: #efff3a">partiellement</span></td>
<td>pré-GDP</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
@c -*- coding: utf-8; mode: texinfo; documentlanguage: fr -*-
@c This file is part of lilypond.tely
@ignore
- Translation of GIT committish: bdf8540b74167817eab96ed3d13b35477217f9fe
+ Translation of GIT committish: 89af568420c7a794cc29980b4f8fabe10764c152
When revising a translation, copy the HEAD committish of the
version that you are working on. See TRANSLATION for details.
@node Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments
@section Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments
+@lilypondfile[quote]{keyboard-headword.ly}
+
+Ce chapitre traite des différents aspects de la notation que l'on
+rencontre particulièrement avec les instruments qui ont recours à
+plusieurs portées, tels que ceux disposant de claviers, la harpe ou
+le vibraphone. Pour les besoins du discours, et pour simplifier, nous
+parlerons ici de @qq{clavier} bien que le recours à des portées multiples
+concerne aussi des instruments qui en sont dépourvus.
+
@menu
* Common notation for keyboards::
* Piano::
@node Common notation for keyboards
@subsection Common notation for keyboards
+Nous allons examiner ici les problèmes qui peuvent survenir en matière
+de notation pour la plupart des instrument à cordes multiples.
+
@menu
* References for keyboards::
* Changing staff manually::
@node References for keyboards
@unnumberedsubsubsec References for keyboards
-@untranslated
-@ifnothtml
-@englishref
-@end ifnothtml
+@c untranslated
+@c ifnothtml
+@c englishref
+@c end ifnothtml
+@cindex piano, système pour
+@cindex portées pour piano
+@cindex portées pour instrument à clavier
+@cindex portées pour instrument à clés
+@cindex clavier, portées pour instrument à
+@cindex clés, portées pour instrument à
+
+@funindex PianoStaff
+
+La notation pour instrument à clavier est en règle générale présentée
+sous la forme d'un système pour piano, autrement dit deux portées
+normales ou plus réunies par une accolade. Cette notation sert également
+à la harpe ou à d'autres instruments à clés. L'organiste, quant à lui,
+lira une partition composée de deux portées au sein d'un système
+pianistique auquel vient s'adjoindre une portée normale pour le pédalier.
+
+Les portées sont largement autonomes, mais il arrive que des voix
+passent de l'une à l'autre. Le contexte @code{PianoStaff} est
+précisément conçu pour gérer la notation spécifique au piano et autres
+instruments à clavier, notamment ces croisements.
+
+Certaines particularités de la notation pour claviers sont abordées dans
+d'autres chapitres :
+
+@itemize
+
+@item Les claviers ont régulièrement recours à plusieurs voix dont le
+nombre peut varier. voir à ce sujet @ref{Collision resolution}.
+
+@item On peut écrire la musique pour claviers de façon parallèle, comme
+l'explique @ref{Writing music in parallel}.
+
+@item Les indications de doigté sont abrodées dans
+@ref{Fingering instructions}.
+
+@item Les indications en matière de pédalier d'orgue sont traitées comme
+des articulations. Voir à ce sujet @ref{List of articulations}.
+
+@item Pour générer des repères verticaux, voir @ref{Grid lines}.
+
+@item En plus des @notation{Laissez vibrer}, les liaisons en matière de
+clavier peuvent intervenir sur des accords arpégés ou des trémolos.
+Reportez-vous au chapitre @ref{Ties}.
+
+@item Le traitement des arpèges couvrant plusieurs voix ou portées est
+abordé au chapitre @ref{Arpeggio}.
+
+@item Une description des indications de tremolo est disponible au
+chapitre @ref{Tremolo repeats}.
+
+@item Certaines retouches particulières au monde des claviers sont
+abordées au chapitre @rlearning{Real music example}.
+
+@item Des notes fantômes permettent d'introduire des liaisons de tenue
+qui passent d'une voix à l'autre, comme le montre
+@rlearning{Other uses for tweaks}.
+
+@end itemize
+
+
+@seealso
+Manuel d'initiation :
+@rlearning{Real music example},
+@rlearning{Other uses for tweaks}.
+
+Manuel de notation :
+@ref{Grouping staves},
+@ref{Instrument names},
+@ref{Collision resolution},
+@ref{Writing music in parallel},
+@ref{Fingering instructions},
+@ref{List of articulations},
+@ref{Grid lines},
+@ref{Ties},
+@ref{Arpeggio},
+@ref{Tremolo repeats}.
+
+Référence des propriétés internes :
+@rinternals{PianoStaff}.
+
+Exemples de code :
+@rlsr{Keyboards}.
+
-Les systèmes de piano comprennent deux portées réunies par une accolade.
-Les portées sont largement autonomes, mais il arrive que des voix passent
-de l'une à l'autre. Cette notation sert également à la harpe ou à d'autres
-instruments à clavier. Le contexte @code{PianoStaff} est précisément
-conçu pour gérer la notation spécifique au piano, notamment ces croisements.
@knownissues
-Les nuances ne sont pas centrées verticalement, mais il existe
-des astuces. Voir à ce sujet le modèle @q{alignement des nuances au
-piano} au chapitre @rlearning{Piano templates}.
+@cindex claviers, centrage des nuances
+@cindex nuances entre les portées d'un système pianistique
+@cindex piano, nuances entre les portées
+@cindex centrage des nuances entre deux portées de piano
+@funindex staff-padding
+
+Les nuances ne sont pas automatiquement centrées verticalement, mais il
+existe des astuces. Voir à ce sujet le modèle @qq{alignement des
+nuances au piano} au chapitre @rlearning{Piano templates} ; une autre
+solution consiste à augmenter le décalage des nuances par rapport à la
+portée (@code{staff-pagging}) comme l'indique
+@rlearning{Moving objects}.
@node Changing staff manually
@unnumberedsubsubsec Changing staff manually
-@cindex changements de portées manuels
-@cindex changement de portée, manuel
+@cindex changements de portée manuels
+@cindex changement de portée forcé
+@cindex inter-portée, notes
+@cindex notes inter-portée
+@cindex inter-portée, ligatures
+@cindex ligature inter-portée
+
+@funindex \change
+@funindex change
Il est possible de passer d'une portée à l'autre de façon manuelle, au
moyen de la commande
@example
-\change Staff = @var{nomDeLaPortee} @var{musique}
+\change Staff = @var{nomDeLaPortee}
@end example
@noindent
La valeur @var{nomDeLaPortee} est le nom de la portée sur laquelle va se
déplacer la voix courante. Pour des raisons pratiques, on nomme la portée
supérieure @code{"haut"} et la portée inférieure @code{"bas"}, donc
-@var{nomDeLaPortee} désigne habituellement @code{"haut"} ou
-@code{"bas"}. Dans tous les cas, le contexte de portée ainsi utilisé
-doit exister au préalable. C'est pourquoi il est d'usage de commencer
-par définir les portées
+@var{nomDeLaPortee} désigne habituellement @code{"haut"}, @code{"bas"},
+@code{"MD"} ou @code{"MG"}. Dans tous les cas, le contexte de
+portée ainsi utilisé doit exister au préalable.
-@example
-<<
- \new Staff = "haut" @{
- \skip 1 * 10 % @emph{de façon à prolonger la portée}
- @}
- \new Staff = "bas" @{
- \skip 1 * 10 % @emph{idem}
- @}
+Pour ligaturer automatiquement des notes entre deux portées, procédez
+ainsi :
+
+@lilypond[verbatim,quote]
+\new PianoStaff <<
+ \new Staff = "up" {
+ <e' c'>8
+ \change Staff = "down"
+ g8 fis g
+ \change Staff = "up"
+ <g'' c''>8
+ \change Staff = "down"
+ e8 dis e
+ \change Staff = "up"
+ }
+ \new Staff = "down" {
+ \clef bass
+ % keep staff alive
+ s1
+ }
>>
-@end example
+@end lilypond
+Si les ligatures demandaient à être retouchées, commencez par
+modifier la direction des hampes. L'emplacement des ligatures sera
+alors calculé à partir du centre de la portée la plus proche -- voir
+@rlearning{Fixing overlapping notation} pour un exemple de retouche sur
+des ligatures.
-avant d'insérer une mélodie au moyen d'un contexte @code{Voice} :
-@example
-\context Staff = bas
- \new Voice @{ @dots{} \change Staff = haut @dots{} @}
-@end example
+@seealso
+Manuel d'initiation :
+@rlearning{Fixing overlapping notation}.
+
+Manuel de notation :
+@ref{Stems},
+@ref{Automatic beams}.
+
+Exemples de code :
+@rlsr{Keyboards}.
+
+Référence des propriétés internes :
+@rinternals{Beam},
+@rinternals{ContextChange}.
@node Changing staff automatically
@unnumberedsubsubsec Changing staff automatically
+
@cindex Changement de portée automatique
@cindex Automatique, changement de portée
+@funindex \autochange
+@funindex autochange
+@funindex PianoStaff
+
Les voix peuvent passer automatiquement d'une portée à l'autre, au moyen
de la syntaxe suivante :
-@quotation
@example
\autochange @dots{}@var{musique}@dots{}
@end example
-@end quotation
@noindent
Deux portées seront alors créées au sein du contexte @code{PianoStaff},
-nommées respectivement @code{up} et @code{down}. La portée du bas, par
-défaut, sera en clé de fa.
-
-Une section en mode @code{\relative} se situant en dehors de la commande
-@code{\autochange} n'aura pas d'effet sur les hauteurs de l'expression
-@var{musique} ; si on utilise @code{\relative}, il est donc préférable
-de mettre @code{\relative} @emph{après} @code{\autochange} et non avant :
+nommées respectivement @code{"up"} et @code{"down"}. La portée du bas
+sera par défaut en clé de fa. La commande @code{\autochange} bascule
+les notes d'une portée à l'autre en fonction de leur hauteur (le do du
+milieu servant de pivot), et place les silences en fonction des notes
+qui les suivront. Ainsi :
+
+@lilypond[quote,verbatim]
+\new PianoStaff {
+ \autochange {
+ g4 a b c'
+ d'4 r a g
+ }
+}
+@end lilypond
-@quotation
-@example
-\autochange \relative @dots{} @dots{}
-@end example
-@end quotation
+@cindex mode relatif et autochange
+@cindex autochange et mode relatif
-La commande @code{\autochange} bascule les notes d'une portée à l'autre
-en fonction de leur hauteur (le do du milieu servant de charnière), et
-place les silences en fonction des notes qui les suivront. Ainsi :
+@funindex \relative
+@funindex relative
-@lilypond[quote,verbatim,ragged-right]
-\new PianoStaff
- \autochange \relative c'
- {
- g4 a b c d r4 a g
+Une section en mode @code{\relative} se situant en dehors de la commande
+@code{\autochange} n'aura pas d'effet sur les hauteurs de l'expression
+@var{musique}. Il est donc préférable d'introduire la directive
+@code{\relative} @strong{après} @code{\autochange}.
+
+Lorsque des contrôles particuliers doivent s'appliquer aux portées,
+mieux vaut les nommer explicitement -- attention : sous peine
+d'effet indésirable quant au résultat, la portée supérieure doit
+s'appeler @code{"up"} et l'inférieure @code{"down"} ; @emph{ceci est à
+notre connaissance le seul cas où ces noms de variable sont figés}.
+Cette procédure sert, entre autres, à indiquer l'armure sur la portée
+inférieure :
+
+@c Keep Ly needed, otherwise 'up' and 'down' get
+@c incorrectly translated in verbatim output
+@c KEEP LY
+@lilypond[quote,verbatim,nogettext]
+\new PianoStaff <<
+ \new Staff = "up" {
+ \new Voice = "melodieUn" {
+ \key g \major
+ \autochange \relative c' {
+ g8 b a c b d c e
+ d8 r fis, g a2
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ \new Staff = "down" {
+ \key g \major
+ \clef bass
}
+>>
@end lilypond
@seealso
-Dans ce même manuel : @ref{Changing staff manually}.
+Dans ce même manuel :
+@ref{Changing staff manually}.
+
+Exemples de code :
+@rlsr{Keyboards}.
-Référence du programme : @rinternals{AutoChangeMusic}.
+Référence des propriétés internes :
+@rinternals{AutoChangeMusic}.
@knownissues
+@cindex accords, répartition sur plusieurs portées avec \autochange
+
Les changements de portée automatiques n'interviennent pas toujours à
l'endroit le plus opportun. Pour un résultat de meilleure qualité, il
vaut mieux indiquer soi-même ces changements.
+Un accord ne peut se répartir sur plusieurs portées ; sa portée
+d'affectation sera déterminée par la première hauteur mentionnée dans la
+construction de cet accord.
+
@code{\autochange} ne peut intervenir à l'intérieur d'une commande
@code{\times}.
@cindex mélodie d'une portée à une autre
@funindex followVoice
+@funindex \showStaffSwitch
+@funindex showStaffSwitch
+@funindex \hideStaffSwitch
+@funindex hideStaffSwitch
Lorsqu'une voix change de portée, il est possible d'imprimer
-automatiquement une ligne reliant les notes, en attribuant à la variable
-@code{followVoice} la valeur @emph{vrai} :
+automatiquement une ligne reliant les notes, en faisant appel à la
+commande @code{\showStaffSwitch} :
-@lilypond[quote,ragged-right,fragment,relative=1,verbatim]
+@lilypond[quote,verbatim,relative=1]
\new PianoStaff <<
- \new Staff="one" {
- \set followVoice = ##t
+ \new Staff = "one" {
+ \showStaffSwitch
c1
- \change Staff=two
+ \change Staff = "two"
b2 a
}
- \new Staff="two" { \clef bass \skip 1*2 }
+ \new Staff = "two" {
+ \clef bass
+ s1*2
+ }
>>
@end lilypond
-@seealso
-Référence du programme : @rinternals{VoiceFollower}.
-
-
@predefined
-@funindex \showStaffSwitch
@code{\showStaffSwitch},
-@funindex \hideStaffSwitch
@code{\hideStaffSwitch}.
@endpredefined
+@seealso
+Extraits de code :
+@rlsr{Keyboards}.
+
+Référence des propriétés internes :
+@rinternals{Note_head_line_engraver},
+@rinternals{VoiceFollower}.
+
+
@node Cross-staff stems
@unnumberedsubsubsec Cross-staff stems
@cindex hampe, enjambement portées
@cindex distance entre deux portées de piano
+@funindex Stem
+@funindex cross-staff
+@funindex length
+@funindex flag-style
+
Pour écrire des accords qui enjambent deux portées, on allonge la hampe
de l'accord de l'une des deux portées de façon à ce qu'elle rejoigne celle de
l'autre portée.
-@lilypond[ragged-right,verbatim,quote]
-stemExtend = {
- \once \override Stem #'length = #10
- \once \override Stem #'cross-staff = ##t
-}
-noFlag = \once \override Stem #'flag-style = #'no-flag
+@lilypond[verbatim,quote]
\new PianoStaff <<
\new Staff {
- \stemDown \stemExtend
- f'4
- \stemExtend \noFlag
- f'8
+ \relative c' {
+ f8 e4 d8 d f e4
+ }
}
\new Staff {
- \clef bass
- a4 a8
+ \relative c' {
+ << {
+ \clef bass
+ % stems may overlap the other staff
+ \override Stem #'cross-staff = ##t
+ % extend the stems to reach other other staff
+ \override Stem #'length = #12
+ % do not print extra flags
+ \override Stem #'flag-style = #'no-flag
+ % prevent beaming as needed
+ a8 g4 f8 f bes\noBeam g4
+ }
+ \\
+ {
+ f,2 bes4 c
+ } >>
+ }
}
>>
@end lilypond
+@snippets
+@lilypondfile[verbatim,lilyquote,texidoc,doctitle]
+{indicating-cross-staff-chords-with-arpeggio-bracket.ly}
+
+
+@seealso
+Extraits de code :
+@rlsr{Keyboards}.
+
+Référence des propriétés internes :
+@rinternals{Stem}.
+
@node Piano
@subsection Piano
+Ce chapitre traîte des aspects de la notation directement liés au piano.
+
@menu
* Piano pedals::
@end menu
@node Piano pedals
@unnumberedsubsubsec Piano pedals
-@cindex Pédales
-Le piano possède deux pédales, parfois trois, permettant de modifier
-l'émission du son. Il est possible d'indiquer précisément chacune
-d'entre elles, en ajoutant à une note ou un accord les commandes
-suivantes :
-@multitable {enfoncerr} {pédale de tenuee} {pédale una cordaa} {\sostenutoOnnnn}
-@item @tab pédale de tenue @tab pédale @emph{una corda} @tab pédale tonale
-@item enfoncer @tab @code{\sustainOn} @tab @code{\unaCorda} @tab @code{\sostenutoOn}
-@item relâcher @tab @code{\sustainOff} @tab @code{\treCorde} @tab @code{\sostenutoOff}
-@end multitable
-
-@lilypond[quote,ragged-right,fragment,verbatim]
-c'4\sustainOn c'4\sustainOff
-@end lilypond
-
-Les modalités d'impression de ces indications sont définies par la
-propriété @code{pedal@var{X}Strings}, @var{X} étant l'une des trois
-pédales @code{Sustain}, @code{Sostenuto} ou @code{UnaCorda}. Voyez
-la référence du programme, section @rinternals{SustainPedal}, pour en
-savoir plus.
+@cindex piano et pédales
+@cindex pédales de piano
+@cindex sustain, pédale
+@cindex pédale sustain
+@cindex sostenuto, pédale
+@cindex pédale sostenuto
+@cindex una corda
+@cindex tre corde
+@cindex sos.
+@cindex U.C.
+
+@funindex \sustainOn
+@funindex sustainOn
+@funindex \sustainOff
+@funindex sustainOff
+@funindex \sostenutoOn
+@funindex sostenutoOn
+@funindex \sostenutoOff
+@funindex sostenutoOff
+@funindex \unaCorda
+@funindex unaCorda
+@funindex \treCorde
+@funindex treCorde
-La propriété @code{pedalSustainStyle} permet différentes notations de
-pédale, en utilisant des crochets
-@lilypond[quote,ragged-right,fragment,verbatim,relative=2]
-\set Staff.pedalSustainStyle = #'bracket
-c\sustainOn d e
-b\sustainOff\sustainOn
-b g \sustainOff a \sustainOn \bar "|."
+Le piano possède deux pédales, parfois trois, permettant de modifier
+l'émission du son : une pédale de @notation{tenue} (@emph{sustain}),
+une pédale de @notation{sourdine} (@emph{una corda} ou @emph{U.C.}) et
+une pédale @notation{tonale} (@emph{sostenuto} ou @emph{sos.}). La
+pédale @emph{sustain} se rencontre aussi sur les vibraphones et
+celestas.
+
+@lilypond[quote,verbatim,relative=2]
+c4\sustainOn d e g
+<c, f a>1\sustainOff
+c4\sostenutoOn e g c,
+<bes d f>1\sostenutoOff
+c4\unaCorda d e g
+<d fis a>1\treCorde
@end lilypond
-@noindent
-ou en mélangeant indications textuelles et crochets
-
-@lilypond[quote,ragged-right,fragment,verbatim,relative=2]
+@cindex pédale, styles d'indications de
+@cindex pédale, indication textuelle de
+@cindex pédale, indication graphique de
+@cindex pédale, indication combinée de
+@cindex pédale sustain, style
+@cindex sustain, style de pédale
+
+@funindex pedalSustainStyle
+@funindex mixed
+@funindex bracket
+@funindex text
+
+Trois styles sont à votre disposition pour imprimer les indications de
+pédale : sous forme de texte, de crochet, ou une combinaison des deux.
+@code{text} est le style de notation par défaut pour les pédales de
+tenue ou de sourdine --- le traditionnel @q{*Ped.}. La pédale tonale,
+en revanche, utilise @code{mixed} par défaut.
+
+@lilypond[quote,verbatim,relative=2]
+c4\sustainOn g c2\sustainOff
\set Staff.pedalSustainStyle = #'mixed
-c\sustainOn d e
-b\sustainOff\sustainOn
-b g \sustainOff a \sustainOn \bar "|."
-@end lilypond
-
-@code{text} est le style de notation par défaut pour la pédale de
-tenue --- le traditionnel @q{*Ped.}. La pédale tonale, en revanche,
-utilise @code{mixed} par défaut.
-
-@lilypond[quote,ragged-right,fragment,verbatim,relative=2]
-c\sostenutoOn d e c, f g a\sostenutoOff
+c4\sustainOn g c d
+d\sustainOff\sustainOn g, c2\sustainOff
+\set Staff.pedalSustainStyle = #'bracket
+c4\sustainOn g c d
+d\sustainOff\sustainOn g, c2
+\bar "|."
@end lilypond
-Il est possible de d'affiner l'apparence d'un crochet de pédale, au
-moyen des propriétés @code{edge-width}, @code{edge-height}, et
-@code{shorten-pair}, appliquées aux objets @code{PianoPedalBracket} ---
-voir la référence du programme, section
-@rinternals{PianoPedalBracket}. Par exemple, on peut étirer le crochet
-jusqu'à l'extrémité droite de la dernière note :
-
-@lilypond[quote,ragged-right,fragment,verbatim,relative=2]
-\override Staff.PianoPedalBracket #'shorten-pair = #'(0 . -1.0)
-c\sostenutoOn d e c, f g a\sostenutoOff
-@end lilypond
+Le placement des commandes de pédale correspond au mouvement de la
+pédale de tenue pendant le jeu. Garder une pédale enclanchée jusqu'à la
+barre finale s'obtient tout simplement en omettant la commande de
+relacher.
@seealso
-Dans ce manuel : @ref{Ties} @qq{laissez vibrer}.
+Manuel de notation :
+@ref{Ties}.
+
+Extraits de code :
+@rlsr{Keyboards}.
+
+Référence des propriétés internes :
+@rinternals{SustainPedal},
+@rinternals{SustainPedalLineSpanner},
+@rinternals{SustainEvent},
+@rinternals{SostenutoPedal},
+@rinternals{SostenutoPedalLineSpanner},
+@rinternals{SostenutoEvent},
+@rinternals{UnaCordaPedal},
+@rinternals{UnaCordaPedalLineSpanner},
+@rinternals{UnaCordaEvent},
+@rinternals{PianoPedalBracket},
+@rinternals{Piano_pedal_engraver}.
@node Accordion
# Copyright (C) 2006 Han-Wen Nienhuys, Jan Nieuwenhuizen
# This file is distributed under the same license as the lilypond package.
# Till Rettig <till.rettig@gmx.de>, 2007,2008
-#
-#
+#
+#
msgid ""
msgstr ""
"Project-Id-Version: de\n"
"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
-"POT-Creation-Date: 2008-12-07 23:30+0100\n"
-"PO-Revision-Date: 2008-12-08 21:36+0200\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2008-12-20 13:08+0100\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2008-12-14 00:17+0200\n"
"Last-Translator: Till Rettig <till.rettig@gmx.de>\n"
"Language-Team: de\n"
"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
#. Documentation/user/tutorial.itely:1791 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/working.itely:214 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/working.itely:229 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1035 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1078 (context id)
msgid "violin"
msgstr "Geige"
#. @rglos in Documentation/es/user/chords.itely
#. @rglos in Documentation/de/user/tutorial.itely
#. @rglos in Documentation/de/user/simultaneous.itely
+#. @rglos in Documentation/de/user/chords.itely
msgid "chord"
msgstr "Akkord"
#. Documentation/user/vocal.itely:506 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/vocal.itely:1235 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/vocal.itely:1276 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:329 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:338 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:243 (context id)
#. input/lsr/adding-fingerings-to-tablatures.ly:16 (variable)
#. input/lsr/jazz-combo-template.ly:204 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1242 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:2646 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3469 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3475 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/simultaneous.itely:788 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/percussion.itely:497 (variable)
#. input/lsr/ancient-notation-template----modern-transcription-of-mensural-music.ly:46 (variable)
msgstr "SoprNoten"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1298 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3471 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3477 (variable)
msgid "AltoMusic"
msgstr "AltNoten"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1299 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3472 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3478 (variable)
msgid "TenorMusic"
msgstr "TenorNoten"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1300 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3473 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3479 (variable)
msgid "BassMusic"
msgstr "BassNoten"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1301 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3474 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3480 (variable)
msgid "VerseOne"
msgstr "StropheEins"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1303 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3475 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3481 (variable)
msgid "VerseTwo"
msgstr "StropheZwei"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1305 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3476 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3482 (variable)
msgid "VerseThree"
msgstr "StropheDrei"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1307 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3477 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3483 (variable)
msgid "VerseFour"
msgstr "StropheVier"
msgstr "Sopr"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1315 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3484 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3490 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:951 (context id)
msgid "Alto"
msgstr "Alt"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1323 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3492 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3498 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:953 (context id)
msgid "Tenor"
msgstr "Tenor"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1324 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3493 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3499 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:958 (context id)
#. input/lsr/jazz-combo-template.ly:227 (variable)
msgid "Bass"
msgid "Building a score from scratch"
msgstr "Eine Partitur von Grund auf erstellen"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:596 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:731 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:597 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:732 (comment)
msgid "Increase thickness of all following slurs from 1.2 to 5.0"
msgstr "Dicke aller folgenden Bögen von 1.2 zu 5.0 vergrößern"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:665 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:704 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:707 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:666 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:705 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:708 (comment)
msgid "Increase thickness of immediately following slur only"
msgstr "Nur die Dicke des direkt folgenden Bogens vergrößern"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:735 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:736 (comment)
msgid "Revert thickness of all following slurs to default of 1.2"
msgstr "Die Dicke aller folgenden Bögen zurücksezten auf 1.2"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1395 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1396 (comment)
msgid "Don't print clefs in this staff"
msgstr "Keine Schlüssel in diesem System"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1397 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1398 (comment)
msgid "Don't print time signatures in this staff"
msgstr "Keine Taktangabe in diesem System"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1461 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1462 (comment)
msgid "Reduce all font sizes by ~24%"
msgstr "Alle Schriftgrößen um ~24% verkleinern"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1527 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1528 (comment)
msgid "Reduce stem length and line spacing to match"
msgstr "Die Halslänge und Linienabstand anpassen"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1957 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2027 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1958 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2028 (comment)
msgid "Set details for later Text Spanner"
msgstr "Details für späteren Text-Spanner setzen"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1960 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2030 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1961 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2031 (comment)
msgid "Place dynamics above staff"
msgstr "Dynamik-Zeichen über System setzen"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1962 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2034 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1963 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2035 (comment)
msgid "Start Ottava Bracket"
msgstr "Beginn der Oktavierungsklammer"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1965 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1972 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2037 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2044 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1966 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1973 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2038 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2045 (comment)
msgid "Add Dynamic Text"
msgstr "Dynamik-Text hinzufügen"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1967 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2039 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1968 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2040 (comment)
msgid "Add Dynamic Line Spanner"
msgstr "Dynamic Line Spanner hinzufügen"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1969 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2041 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1970 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2042 (comment)
msgid "Add Text Script"
msgstr "Textbeschriftung hinzufügen"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1974 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2046 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1975 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2047 (comment)
msgid "Stop Ottava Bracket"
msgstr "Ende der Oktavierungsklammer"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2032 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2033 (comment)
msgid "Place following Ottava Bracket below Text Spanners"
msgstr "Nächste Ottava-Klammer unter Text-Spanner setzen"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2094 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2095 (comment)
msgid "Cause notes to space out to accommodate text"
msgstr "Noten spreizen um dem Text Platz zu machen"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2117 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2118 (comment)
msgid "This markup is short enough to fit without collision"
msgstr "Dieser Text ist kurz genug um ohne Kollision zu passen"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2121 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2122 (comment)
msgid "This is too long to fit, so it is displaced upwards"
msgstr "Dieser ist zu lang, darum wird der nach oben verschoben"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2125 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2130 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2126 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2131 (comment)
msgid "Turn off collision avoidance"
msgstr "Abschalten der automatischen Vermeidung von Zusammenstößen"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2132 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2133 (comment)
msgid "and turn on textLengthOn"
msgstr "und Textlänge berücksichtigen"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2133 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2134 (comment)
msgid "Spaces at end are honored"
msgstr "Leerzeichen am Ende werden beachtet"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2240 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2241 (comment)
msgid "Extend width by 1 staff space"
msgstr "Breite um einen Linienabstand vergrößern"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2523 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2524 (comment)
msgid "This will not work, see below:"
msgstr "Das funktioniert nicht, siehe unten"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2527 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2528 (comment)
msgid "This works:"
msgstr "Das funktioniert:"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2578 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2579 (variable)
msgid "naturalplusflat"
msgstr "AuflösungB"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2619 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2620 (comment)
msgid "Extend width by 1 unit"
msgstr "Breite um eine Einheit vergrößern"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2621 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2622 (comment)
msgid "Align dynamics to a base line 2 units above staff"
msgstr ""
"Dynamik-Zeichen an einer Linie ausrichten, die 2 Einheiten über dem System "
"ist"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2925 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2974 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3035 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3105 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3170 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3230 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2926 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2975 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3036 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3106 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3171 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3231 (variable)
msgid "rhMusic"
msgstr "rhNoten"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2930 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2979 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3042 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3114 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3179 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2931 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2980 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3043 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3115 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3180 (comment)
msgid "Start polyphonic section of four voices"
msgstr "Beginn des polyphonen Abschnitts mit vier Stimmen"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2943 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2992 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3055 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3129 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3196 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3258 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2944 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2993 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3056 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3130 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3197 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3259 (variable)
msgid "lhMusic"
msgstr "lhNoten"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2952 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3001 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3064 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3138 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3205 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3267 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2953 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3002 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3065 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3139 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3206 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3268 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:964 (context id)
msgid "RH"
msgstr "RH"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2956 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3005 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3068 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3142 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3209 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3271 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2957 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3006 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3069 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3143 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3210 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3272 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:970 (context id)
msgid "LH"
msgstr "LH"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3183 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3245 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3184 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3246 (comment)
msgid "Move the c2 out of the main note column so the merge will work"
msgstr ""
"Verschiebe das c2 aus der Hauptnotenkolumne, damit Verschmelzung funktioniert"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3186 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3248 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3187 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3249 (comment)
msgid "Stem on the d2 must be down to permit merging"
msgstr "Hals vom d2 muss nach unten, damit Verschmelzung gelingt"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3243 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3244 (comment)
msgid "Reposition the c2 to the right of the merged note"
msgstr "c2 neu positionieren rechts von der verschmolzenen Note"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3379 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3401 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3380 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3402 (comment)
msgid "Visible tempo marking"
msgstr "Sichtbare Tempo-Bezeichnung"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3383 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3405 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3384 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3406 (comment)
msgid "Invisible tempo marking to lengthen fermata in MIDI"
msgstr "Unsichtbare Tempo-Bezeichnung um Fermate im MIDI zu verlängern"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3386 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3408 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3387 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3409 (comment)
msgid "New tempo for next section"
msgstr "Neues Tempo im nächsten Abschnitt"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3460 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3466 (variable)
msgid "emphasize"
msgstr "emphasize"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3464 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3470 (variable)
msgid "normal"
msgstr "normal"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3470 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3476 (variable)
msgid "SopranoMusic"
msgstr "SopranNoten"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3483 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3489 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:949 (context id)
msgid "Soprano"
msgstr "Sopran"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3692 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3698 (comment)
msgid "Arrange to obtain color from color-notehead procedure"
msgstr "Anordnungen um Farbe von der color-notehead-Prozedur zu erhalten"
msgstr "LilyPond-Dateien erstellen"
#. @top in Documentation/user/lilypond.tely
+#. @top in Documentation/de/user/lilypond.tely
msgid "GNU LilyPond --- Notation Reference"
msgstr "GNU LilyPond -- Notationsreferenz"
msgid "Musical notation"
msgstr "Musikalische Notation"
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:666 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:688 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:1033 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:1052 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:1089 (variable)
msgid "music"
msgstr "Noten"
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1039 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1082 (comment)
msgid "not strictly necessary, but a good reminder"
msgstr "nicht unbdingt nötig, aber gut zu erinnern"
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1046 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1089 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/staff.itely:1076 (variable)
msgid "clarinet"
msgstr "Klarinette"
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1130 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1174 (variable)
msgid "musicA"
msgstr "NotenA"
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1144 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1188 (variable)
msgid "musicB"
msgstr "NotenB"
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1163 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:171 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:265 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1207 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:175 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:274 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/percussion.itely:175 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/percussion.itely:365 (variable)
#. input/lsr/jazz-combo-template.ly:241 (variable)
msgid "up"
msgstr "oben"
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1167 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:181 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:274 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1211 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:185 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:283 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/percussion.itely:178 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/percussion.itely:366 (variable)
#. input/lsr/jazz-combo-template.ly:247 (variable)
msgid "Formatting cue notes"
msgstr "Stichnoten formatieren"
-#. Documentation/user/editorial.itely:325 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/editorial.itely:326 (comment)
msgid "this is deliberate nonsense; note that the stems remain black"
msgstr "Das ist Unsinn, die Hälsen bleiben schwarz"
msgid "Printing stanzas at the end in multiple columns"
msgstr "Die Strophen am Ende in mehreren Spalten drucken"
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:183 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:187 (comment)
msgid "keep staff alive"
msgstr "System aufrecht erhalten"
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:266 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:275 (context id)
msgid "melOne"
msgstr "melEins"
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:335 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:344 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:244 (context id)
#. input/lsr/adding-fingerings-to-tablatures.ly:17 (variable)
#. input/lsr/jazz-combo-template.ly:205 (context id)
msgid "two"
msgstr "zwei"
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:389 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:398 (comment)
msgid "stems may overlap the other staff"
msgstr "Hals kann das andere System überschneiden"
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:391 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:400 (comment)
msgid "extend the stems to reach other other staff"
msgstr "Hälse verlängern um anderes System zu erreichen"
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:393 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:402 (comment)
msgid "do not print extra flags"
msgstr "keine doppelten Fähnchen"
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:395 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:404 (comment)
msgid "prevent beaming as needed"
msgstr "Balken verhindern"
#. @node in Documentation/user/keyboards.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/keyboards.itely
-msgid "Harp notation"
-msgstr "Harfennotation"
+#. @node in Documentation/es/user/keyboards.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/keyboards.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/keyboards.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/keyboards.itely
+#, fuzzy
+msgid "References for harps"
+msgstr "Referenz für Tasteninstrumente"
#. @node in Documentation/user/keyboards.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/keyboards.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/es/user/keyboards.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/keyboards.itely
#. @node in Documentation/de/user/keyboards.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/keyboards.itely
msgid "Harp pedals"
msgid "A chord for ukelele"
msgstr "Akkord für Ukulele"
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:770 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:793 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:822 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:851 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:875 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:919 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:782 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:805 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:834 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:865 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:889 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:935 (variable)
msgid "mychords"
msgstr "meineAkkorde"
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:797 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:809 (variable)
msgid "mychordlist"
msgstr "meineAkkordliste"
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:906 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:922 (comment)
msgid "add a new chord shape"
msgstr "Neues Akkordmuster hinzufügen"
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:910 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:926 (comment)
msgid "add some new chords based on the power chord shape"
msgstr "neue Akkorde basierend auf dem power-chord-Muster hinzufügen"
msgid "Bagpipe example"
msgstr "Dudelsack-Beispiele"
-#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:654 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:663 (variable)
msgid "myChords"
msgstr "meineAkkorde"
-#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:984 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:1005 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:993 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:1014 (comment)
msgid "Put notes on same Staff as figures"
msgstr "Noten auf dem gleichen System wie die Symbole"
-#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:1068 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:1077 (comment)
msgid "The extenders are correct here, with the same rhythm as the bass"
msgstr "Linien stimmen hier, mit dem gleichen Rhythmus wie im Bass"
-#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:1080 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:1089 (comment)
msgid "The extenders are incorrect here, even though the timing is the same"
msgstr "Linien stimmen nicht, obwohl der Rhythmus der gleiche ist"
#. @rglos in Documentation/user/chords.itely
#. @rglos in Documentation/es/user/chords.itely
+#. @rglos in Documentation/de/user/chords.itely
msgid "figured bass"
msgstr "Generalbass"
msgid "now they will collide"
msgstr "jetzt kollidieren sie"
-#. Documentation/user/spacing.itely:1788 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/spacing.itely:1789 (comment)
msgid "the markup is too close to the following note"
msgstr "Beschriftung zu nah an der folgenden Note"
-#. Documentation/user/spacing.itely:1791 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/spacing.itely:1793 (comment)
msgid "setting outside-staff-horizontal-padding fixes this"
msgstr "Setzen von outside-staff-horizontal-padding hilft"
#. @subsection in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @subsection in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Staff symbol properties"
msgstr "Eigenschaften von Staff (Notensystem)-Symbol"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{spanner-interface}"
msgstr "Das @code{spanner-interface} benutzen"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{line-spanner-interface}"
msgstr "Das @code{line-spanner-interface} benutzen"
#. @subsection in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @subsection in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Visibility of objects"
msgstr "Sichtbarkeit von Objekten"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Rotating layout objects"
msgstr "Drehen von Objekten"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Rotating markup"
msgstr "Textbeschriftung drehen"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Setting @code{X-offset} and @code{Y-offset} directly"
msgstr "@code{X-offset} und @code{Y-offset} direkt setzen"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{side-position-interface}"
msgstr "Das @code{side-position-interface} benutzen"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{self-alignment-interface}"
msgstr "Das @code{self-alignment-interface} benutzen"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{aligned-on-parent} procedures"
msgstr "Die @code{aligned-on-parent}-Prozeduren benutzen"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{centered-on-parent} procedures"
msgstr "Die @code{centered-on-parent}-Prozeduren benutzen"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{break-aligned-interface}"
-msgstr "Das @{break-aligned-interface} benutzen"
+msgstr "Das @code{break-aligned-interface} benutzen"
#. @node in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @subsection in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Modifying ties and slurs"
msgstr "Bögen verändern"
#. @section in Documentation/user/programming-interface.itely
#. @subsection in Documentation/fr/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @section in Documentation/es/user/programming-interface.itely
-#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
+#. @section in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
msgid "Using Scheme code instead of @code{\\tweak}"
msgstr "Scheme-Code anstelle von @code{\tweak} verwenden"
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/programming-interface.itely
#. @section in Documentation/es/user/programming-interface.itely
#. @node in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
-#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
+#. @section in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
msgid "Difficult tweaks"
msgstr "Schwierige Korrekturen"
msgid "GNU LilyPond -- Programmbenutzung"
msgstr "GNU LilyPond -- Programmbenutzung"
-#. @top in Documentation/de/user/lilypond.tely
-msgid "GNU LilyPond -- Notationsreferenz"
-msgstr "GNU LilyPond -- Notationsreferenz"
-
#. @chapheading in Documentation/de/user/lilypond.tely
msgid "Das Notensatzprogramm"
msgstr "Das Notensatzprogramm"
msgid "Ignorieren von Melismen"
msgstr "Melismen ignorieren"
-#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-#. @section in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-msgid "Common properties"
-msgstr "Übliche Eigenschaften"
-
-#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-msgid "Controlling visibility of objects"
-msgstr "Die Sichtbarkeit von Objekten kontrollieren"
-
-#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-msgid "Modifying ends of spanners"
-msgstr "Enden von Streckern verändern"
-
-#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-#. @section in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-msgid "Discussion of specific tweaks"
-msgstr "Erklärung von speziellen Optimierungen"
-
-#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-msgid "old Contexts explained"
-msgstr "Alte Kontexte"
-
-#. @node in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
-#. @section in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
-msgid "TODO moved into scheme"
-msgstr "TODO nach Scheme verschoben"
-
#. input/lsr/accordion-discant-symbols.ly:34 (variable)
msgid "discant"
msgstr "Diskant"
msgid "Test it:"
msgstr "testen:"
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:21 (comment)
-msgid "Use 'bar-size to control the height of the tick,"
-msgstr "'bar-size benutzen um die Höhe des Häkchens zu bestimmen,"
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:22 (comment)
-msgid "and 'extra-offset to determine its position."
-msgstr "'extra-offset, umd seine Position zu bestimmen."
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:24 (comment)
-msgid "With 'extra-offset set to zero, the tick will be"
-msgstr "Mit 'extra-offset auf Null gesetzt, wird das Häkchen"
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:25 (comment)
-msgid "centered around the middle line of the staff."
-msgstr "um die Mittellinie des Systems zentriert"
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:27 (comment)
-msgid "Replace Staff.BarLine with Score.BarLine to"
-msgstr "Staff.BarLine mit Score.BarLine ersetzen"
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:28 (comment)
-msgid "apply the method to the whole score."
-msgstr "um die Methode auf die gesamte Partitur anzuwenden"
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:38 (comment)
-msgid "Revert the overrides to get back a normal"
-msgstr "alles rückgängig machen und eine normale"
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:39 (comment)
-msgid "bar line at the end."
-msgstr "Taktlinie am Ende setzen"
-
#. input/lsr/transcription-of-ancient-music-with-incipit.ly:127 (variable)
msgid "incipitDiscantus"
msgstr "incipitDiscantus"
msgid "Table of Contents"
msgstr "Inhaltsverzeichnis"
+#~ msgid "Harp notation"
+#~ msgstr "Harfennotation"
+
+#~ msgid "GNU LilyPond -- Notationsreferenz"
+#~ msgstr "GNU LilyPond -- Notationsreferenz"
+
+#~ msgid "Common properties"
+#~ msgstr "Übliche Eigenschaften"
+
+#~ msgid "Controlling visibility of objects"
+#~ msgstr "Die Sichtbarkeit von Objekten kontrollieren"
+
+#~ msgid "Modifying ends of spanners"
+#~ msgstr "Enden von Streckern verändern"
+
+#~ msgid "Discussion of specific tweaks"
+#~ msgstr "Erklärung von speziellen Optimierungen"
+
+#~ msgid "old Contexts explained"
+#~ msgstr "Alte Kontexte"
+
+#~ msgid "TODO moved into scheme"
+#~ msgstr "TODO nach Scheme verschoben"
+
+#~ msgid "Use 'bar-size to control the height of the tick,"
+#~ msgstr "'bar-size benutzen um die Höhe des Häkchens zu bestimmen,"
+
+#~ msgid "and 'extra-offset to determine its position."
+#~ msgstr "'extra-offset, umd seine Position zu bestimmen."
+
+#~ msgid "With 'extra-offset set to zero, the tick will be"
+#~ msgstr "Mit 'extra-offset auf Null gesetzt, wird das Häkchen"
+
+#~ msgid "centered around the middle line of the staff."
+#~ msgstr "um die Mittellinie des Systems zentriert"
+
+#~ msgid "Replace Staff.BarLine with Score.BarLine to"
+#~ msgstr "Staff.BarLine mit Score.BarLine ersetzen"
+
+#~ msgid "apply the method to the whole score."
+#~ msgstr "um die Methode auf die gesamte Partitur anzuwenden"
+
+#~ msgid "Revert the overrides to get back a normal"
+#~ msgstr "alles rückgängig machen und eine normale"
+
+#~ msgid "bar line at the end."
+#~ msgstr "Taktlinie am Ende setzen"
+
#~ msgid "applies to \\\"fas\\\""
#~ msgstr "gehört zu \\\"fas\\\""
msgstr ""
"Project-Id-Version: es\n"
"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
-"POT-Creation-Date: 2008-12-07 23:30+0100\n"
-"PO-Revision-Date: 2008-12-03 11:45+0100\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2008-12-20 13:08+0100\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2008-12-11 11:01+0100\n"
"Last-Translator: Francisco Vila <francisco.vila@hispalinux.es>\n"
"Language-Team: Español\n"
"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
#. Documentation/user/tutorial.itely:1791 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/working.itely:214 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/working.itely:229 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1035 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1078 (context id)
msgid "violin"
msgstr "violin"
#. @rglos in Documentation/es/user/chords.itely
#. @rglos in Documentation/de/user/tutorial.itely
#. @rglos in Documentation/de/user/simultaneous.itely
+#. @rglos in Documentation/de/user/chords.itely
msgid "chord"
msgstr "acorde"
#. Documentation/user/vocal.itely:506 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/vocal.itely:1235 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/vocal.itely:1276 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:329 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:338 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:243 (context id)
#. input/lsr/adding-fingerings-to-tablatures.ly:16 (variable)
#. input/lsr/jazz-combo-template.ly:204 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1242 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:2646 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3469 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3475 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/simultaneous.itely:788 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/percussion.itely:497 (variable)
#. input/lsr/ancient-notation-template----modern-transcription-of-mensural-music.ly:46 (variable)
msgstr "MusicaSoprano"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1298 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3471 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3477 (variable)
msgid "AltoMusic"
msgstr "MusicaAlto"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1299 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3472 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3478 (variable)
msgid "TenorMusic"
msgstr "MusicaTenor"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1300 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3473 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3479 (variable)
msgid "BassMusic"
msgstr "MusicaBajo"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1301 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3474 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3480 (variable)
msgid "VerseOne"
msgstr "EstrofaUno"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1303 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3475 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3481 (variable)
msgid "VerseTwo"
msgstr "EstrofaDos"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1305 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3476 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3482 (variable)
msgid "VerseThree"
msgstr "EstrofaTres"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1307 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3477 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3483 (variable)
msgid "VerseFour"
msgstr "EstrofaCuatro"
msgstr "Soprano"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1315 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3484 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3490 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:951 (context id)
msgid "Alto"
msgstr "Alto"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1323 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3492 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3498 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:953 (context id)
msgid "Tenor"
msgstr "Tenor"
# También Líneas divisorias. FVD
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1324 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3493 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3499 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:958 (context id)
#. input/lsr/jazz-combo-template.ly:227 (variable)
msgid "Bass"
msgid "Building a score from scratch"
msgstr "Crear una partitura partiendo de cero"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:596 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:731 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:597 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:732 (comment)
msgid "Increase thickness of all following slurs from 1.2 to 5.0"
msgstr "Aumentar el grosor de todas las ligaduras siguientes de 1.2 a 5.0"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:665 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:704 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:707 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:666 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:705 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:708 (comment)
msgid "Increase thickness of immediately following slur only"
msgstr "Aumentar solamente el grosor de la ligadura siguiente"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:735 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:736 (comment)
msgid "Revert thickness of all following slurs to default of 1.2"
msgstr ""
"Devolver el grosor de las ligaduras siguientes al valor predeterminado 1.2"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1395 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1396 (comment)
msgid "Don't print clefs in this staff"
msgstr "No imprimir la clave en este pentagrama"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1397 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1398 (comment)
msgid "Don't print time signatures in this staff"
msgstr "No imprimir el compás en este pentagrama"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1461 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1462 (comment)
msgid "Reduce all font sizes by ~24%"
msgstr "Reducir el tamaño de la fuente en un 24% aprox."
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1527 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1528 (comment)
msgid "Reduce stem length and line spacing to match"
msgstr ""
"Reducir la longitud de la plica y el espaciado de la línea en coincidencia"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1957 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2027 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1958 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2028 (comment)
msgid "Set details for later Text Spanner"
msgstr "Establecer ajustes para el extensor de texto ulterior"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1960 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2030 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1961 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2031 (comment)
msgid "Place dynamics above staff"
msgstr "Situar la dinámica por encima"
# fuzzy. FVD
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1962 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2034 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1963 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2035 (comment)
msgid "Start Ottava Bracket"
msgstr "Inicio del corchete de octava"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1965 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1972 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2037 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2044 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1966 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1973 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2038 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2045 (comment)
msgid "Add Dynamic Text"
msgstr "Añadir indicación dinámica textual"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1967 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2039 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1968 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2040 (comment)
msgid "Add Dynamic Line Spanner"
msgstr "Añadir indicación dinámica de extensión de línea"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1969 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2041 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1970 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2042 (comment)
msgid "Add Text Script"
msgstr "Guiones de texto"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1974 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2046 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1975 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2047 (comment)
msgid "Stop Ottava Bracket"
msgstr "Detener el corchete de octava"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2032 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2033 (comment)
msgid "Place following Ottava Bracket below Text Spanners"
msgstr ""
"Situar el corchete de octava ulterior por debajo de los extensores de texto"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2094 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2095 (comment)
msgid "Cause notes to space out to accommodate text"
msgstr "Ocasionar que las notas se espacíen para adecuarse al texto"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2117 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2118 (comment)
msgid "This markup is short enough to fit without collision"
msgstr "Este marcado es corto y cabe sin colisionar"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2121 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2122 (comment)
msgid "This is too long to fit, so it is displaced upwards"
msgstr "Este es muy largo y se desplaza hacia arriba"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2125 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2130 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2126 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2131 (comment)
msgid "Turn off collision avoidance"
msgstr "Desactivar el detector de colisiones"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2132 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2133 (comment)
msgid "and turn on textLengthOn"
msgstr "y activar textLengthOn"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2133 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2134 (comment)
msgid "Spaces at end are honored"
msgstr "Los espacios al final se respetan"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2240 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2241 (comment)
msgid "Extend width by 1 staff space"
msgstr "Aumentar la anchura en un espacio de pentagrama"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2523 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2524 (comment)
msgid "This will not work, see below:"
msgstr "Esto no va a funcionar, véase más abajo:"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2527 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2528 (comment)
msgid "This works:"
msgstr "Esto sí funciona:"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2578 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2579 (variable)
msgid "naturalplusflat"
msgstr "becuadro_y_bemol"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2619 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2620 (comment)
msgid "Extend width by 1 unit"
msgstr "Aumentar la anchura en una unidad"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2621 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2622 (comment)
msgid "Align dynamics to a base line 2 units above staff"
msgstr "Alinear los matices a dos unidades por encima del pentagrama"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2925 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2974 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3035 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3105 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3170 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3230 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2926 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2975 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3036 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3106 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3171 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3231 (variable)
msgid "rhMusic"
msgstr "Musica_m_der"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2930 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2979 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3042 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3114 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3179 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2931 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2980 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3043 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3115 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3180 (comment)
msgid "Start polyphonic section of four voices"
msgstr "Inicio de la sección polifónica de cuatro voces"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2943 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2992 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3055 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3129 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3196 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3258 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2944 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2993 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3056 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3130 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3197 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3259 (variable)
msgid "lhMusic"
msgstr "Muslca_m_izq"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2952 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3001 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3064 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3138 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3205 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3267 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2953 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3002 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3065 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3139 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3206 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3268 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:964 (context id)
msgid "RH"
msgstr "MD"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2956 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3005 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3068 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3142 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3209 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3271 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2957 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3006 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3069 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3143 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3210 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3272 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:970 (context id)
msgid "LH"
msgstr "MI"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3183 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3245 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3184 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3246 (comment)
msgid "Move the c2 out of the main note column so the merge will work"
msgstr ""
"Sacar el Do blanca de la columna principal de notas para que la fusión "
"funcione"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3186 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3248 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3187 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3249 (comment)
msgid "Stem on the d2 must be down to permit merging"
msgstr "La plica del Re blanca debe estar hacia abajo para permitir la fusión"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3243 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3244 (comment)
msgid "Reposition the c2 to the right of the merged note"
msgstr "Recolocar el Do blanca a la derecha de la nota fundida"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3379 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3401 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3380 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3402 (comment)
msgid "Visible tempo marking"
msgstr "Indicación metronómica visible"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3383 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3405 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3384 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3406 (comment)
msgid "Invisible tempo marking to lengthen fermata in MIDI"
msgstr "Indicación metronómica invisible para prolongar el calderón en el MIDI"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3386 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3408 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3387 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3409 (comment)
msgid "New tempo for next section"
msgstr "Tempo nuevo para la sección siguiente"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3460 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3466 (variable)
msgid "emphasize"
msgstr "enfatizar"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3464 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3470 (variable)
msgid "normal"
msgstr "normal"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3470 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3476 (variable)
msgid "SopranoMusic"
msgstr "musicaSoprano"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3483 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3489 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:949 (context id)
msgid "Soprano"
msgstr "Soprano"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3692 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3698 (comment)
msgid "Arrange to obtain color from color-notehead procedure"
msgstr "Truco para obtener color a partir del procedimiento color-notehead"
msgstr "Generar archivos de LilyPond"
#. @top in Documentation/user/lilypond.tely
+#. @top in Documentation/de/user/lilypond.tely
msgid "GNU LilyPond --- Notation Reference"
msgstr "GNU LilyPond: Referencia de la notación"
msgid "Musical notation"
msgstr "Notación musical"
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:666 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:688 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:1033 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:1052 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:1089 (variable)
msgid "music"
msgstr "musica"
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1039 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1082 (comment)
msgid "not strictly necessary, but a good reminder"
msgstr "no es imprescindible pero es bueno recordarlo"
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1046 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1089 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/staff.itely:1076 (variable)
msgid "clarinet"
msgstr "clarinete"
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1130 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1174 (variable)
msgid "musicA"
msgstr "musicaA"
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1144 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1188 (variable)
msgid "musicB"
msgstr "musicaB"
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1163 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:171 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:265 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1207 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:175 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:274 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/percussion.itely:175 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/percussion.itely:365 (variable)
#. input/lsr/jazz-combo-template.ly:241 (variable)
msgid "up"
msgstr "arriba"
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1167 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:181 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:274 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1211 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:185 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:283 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/percussion.itely:178 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/percussion.itely:366 (variable)
#. input/lsr/jazz-combo-template.ly:247 (variable)
msgid "Formatting cue notes"
msgstr "Formateo de las notas de aviso"
-#. Documentation/user/editorial.itely:325 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/editorial.itely:326 (comment)
msgid "this is deliberate nonsense; note that the stems remain black"
msgstr ""
"esto no tiene sentido, intencionalmente. Observe que las plicas siguen negras"
msgid "Printing stanzas at the end in multiple columns"
msgstr "Imprimir los versos al final en varias columnas"
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:183 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:187 (comment)
msgid "keep staff alive"
msgstr "mantener vivo el pentagrama"
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:266 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:275 (context id)
msgid "melOne"
msgstr "melodiaUno"
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:335 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:344 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:244 (context id)
#. input/lsr/adding-fingerings-to-tablatures.ly:17 (variable)
#. input/lsr/jazz-combo-template.ly:205 (context id)
msgid "two"
msgstr "dos"
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:389 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:398 (comment)
msgid "stems may overlap the other staff"
msgstr "las plicas pueden superponerse al otro pentagrama"
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:391 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:400 (comment)
msgid "extend the stems to reach other other staff"
msgstr "extender las plicas para que lleguen hasta el otro pentagrama"
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:393 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:402 (comment)
msgid "do not print extra flags"
msgstr "no imprimir corchetes adicionales"
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:395 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:404 (comment)
msgid "prevent beaming as needed"
msgstr "evitar el barrado según necesidades"
#. @node in Documentation/user/keyboards.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/keyboards.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/es/user/keyboards.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/keyboards.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/keyboards.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/keyboards.itely
#, fuzzy
-msgid "Harp notation"
-msgstr "Notación de los pentagramas"
+msgid "References for harps"
+msgstr "Referencias para teclados"
#. @node in Documentation/user/keyboards.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/keyboards.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/es/user/keyboards.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/keyboards.itely
#. @node in Documentation/de/user/keyboards.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/keyboards.itely
-#, fuzzy
msgid "Harp pedals"
-msgstr "Pedales de piano"
+msgstr "Pedales de arpa"
#. @node in Documentation/user/unfretted-strings.itely
#. @section in Documentation/user/unfretted-strings.itely
msgid "A chord for ukelele"
msgstr "Un acorde de ukelele"
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:770 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:793 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:822 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:851 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:875 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:919 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:782 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:805 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:834 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:865 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:889 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:935 (variable)
msgid "mychords"
msgstr "misAcordes"
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:797 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:809 (variable)
msgid "mychordlist"
msgstr "miListaDeAcordes"
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:906 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:922 (comment)
msgid "add a new chord shape"
msgstr "añadir una forma de acorde nueva"
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:910 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:926 (comment)
msgid "add some new chords based on the power chord shape"
msgstr "añadir acordes nuevos basados en la forma de acorde principal"
msgid "Bagpipe example"
msgstr "Ejemplo de música de gaita"
-#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:654 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:663 (variable)
msgid "myChords"
msgstr "misAcordes"
-#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:984 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:1005 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:993 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:1014 (comment)
msgid "Put notes on same Staff as figures"
msgstr "Poner las notas en el mismo pentagrama que los números"
-#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:1068 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:1077 (comment)
msgid "The extenders are correct here, with the same rhythm as the bass"
msgstr "Los extensores aquí son correctos, con el mismo ritmo que el bajo"
-#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:1080 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:1089 (comment)
msgid "The extenders are incorrect here, even though the timing is the same"
msgstr "Los extensores aquí son incorrectos, aunque la medida es la misma"
#. @rglos in Documentation/user/chords.itely
#. @rglos in Documentation/es/user/chords.itely
+#. @rglos in Documentation/de/user/chords.itely
msgid "figured bass"
msgstr "bajo cifrado"
msgid "now they will collide"
msgstr "ahora se producirá la colisión"
-#. Documentation/user/spacing.itely:1788 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/spacing.itely:1789 (comment)
msgid "the markup is too close to the following note"
msgstr "el marcado está demasiado cerca de la nota siguiente"
-#. Documentation/user/spacing.itely:1791 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/spacing.itely:1793 (comment)
msgid "setting outside-staff-horizontal-padding fixes this"
msgstr "ajustar outside-staff-horizontal-padding corrige esto"
#. @subsection in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @subsection in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Staff symbol properties"
msgstr "Propiedades del símbolo del pentagrama"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{spanner-interface}"
msgstr "Uso del @code{spanner-interface}"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{line-spanner-interface}"
msgstr "Uso del @code{line-spanner-interface}"
#. @subsection in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @subsection in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Visibility of objects"
msgstr "Visibilidad de los objetos"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Rotating layout objects"
msgstr "Rotación de objetos de presentación"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Rotating markup"
msgstr "Rotación de elementos de marcado"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Setting @code{X-offset} and @code{Y-offset} directly"
msgstr "Establecer directamente @code{X-offset} y @code{Y-offset}"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{side-position-interface}"
msgstr "Uso del @code{side-position-interface}"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{self-alignment-interface}"
msgstr "Uso del @code{self-alignment-interface}"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{aligned-on-parent} procedures"
msgstr "Uso de los procedimientos @code{aligned-on-parent}"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{centered-on-parent} procedures"
msgstr "Uso de los procedimientos @code{centered-on-parent}"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{break-aligned-interface}"
msgstr "Uso del @code{break-aligned-interface}"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Modifying ties and slurs"
msgstr "Modificación de ligaduras de unión y de expresión"
#. @section in Documentation/user/programming-interface.itely
#. @subsection in Documentation/fr/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @section in Documentation/es/user/programming-interface.itely
-#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
+#. @section in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
msgid "Using Scheme code instead of @code{\\tweak}"
msgstr "Usar código de Scheme en lugar de @code{\\tweak}"
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/programming-interface.itely
#. @section in Documentation/es/user/programming-interface.itely
#. @node in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
-#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
+#. @section in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
msgid "Difficult tweaks"
msgstr "Trucos difíciles"
msgid "GNU LilyPond -- Programmbenutzung"
msgstr ""
-#. @top in Documentation/de/user/lilypond.tely
-#, fuzzy
-msgid "GNU LilyPond -- Notationsreferenz"
-msgstr "GNU LilyPond: Referencia de la notación"
-
#. @chapheading in Documentation/de/user/lilypond.tely
msgid "Das Notensatzprogramm"
msgstr ""
msgid "Ignorieren von Melismen"
msgstr ""
-#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-#. @section in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-msgid "Common properties"
-msgstr "Propiedades más usuales"
-
-#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-msgid "Controlling visibility of objects"
-msgstr "Control de la visibilidad de los objetos"
-
-#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-msgid "Modifying ends of spanners"
-msgstr "Modificación de los extremos de los extensores"
-
-#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-#. @section in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-msgid "Discussion of specific tweaks"
-msgstr "Discusión sobre trucos específicos"
-
-#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-msgid "old Contexts explained"
-msgstr "antiguo Explicación de los contextos"
-
-#. @node in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
-#. @section in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
-msgid "TODO moved into scheme"
-msgstr "HACER trasladado al apartado sobre scheme"
-
#. input/lsr/accordion-discant-symbols.ly:34 (variable)
msgid "discant"
msgstr "discanto"
msgid "Test it:"
msgstr "Probarla:"
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:21 (comment)
-msgid "Use 'bar-size to control the height of the tick,"
-msgstr "Usar 'bar-size para controlar la altura del «tick»,"
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:22 (comment)
-msgid "and 'extra-offset to determine its position."
-msgstr "y 'extra-offset para determinar su posición."
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:24 (comment)
-msgid "With 'extra-offset set to zero, the tick will be"
-msgstr "Con 'extra-offset fijado a cero, el «tick» se centrará"
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:25 (comment)
-msgid "centered around the middle line of the staff."
-msgstr "sobre la línea central del pentagrama."
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:27 (comment)
-msgid "Replace Staff.BarLine with Score.BarLine to"
-msgstr "Sustituya Staff.BarLine con Score.BarLine para"
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:28 (comment)
-msgid "apply the method to the whole score."
-msgstr "aplicar el método a toda la partitura."
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:38 (comment)
-msgid "Revert the overrides to get back a normal"
-msgstr "Revertir las sobreescrituras para volver a tener una"
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:39 (comment)
-msgid "bar line at the end."
-msgstr "barra normal de compás al final."
-
#. input/lsr/transcription-of-ancient-music-with-incipit.ly:127 (variable)
msgid "incipitDiscantus"
msgstr ""
# this is the same translation that babel LaTex package uses . FVD
msgid "Table of Contents"
msgstr "Índice general"
+
+#~ msgid "Harp notation"
+#~ msgstr "Notación para arpa"
+
+#~ msgid "Common properties"
+#~ msgstr "Propiedades más usuales"
+
+#~ msgid "Controlling visibility of objects"
+#~ msgstr "Control de la visibilidad de los objetos"
+
+#~ msgid "Modifying ends of spanners"
+#~ msgstr "Modificación de los extremos de los extensores"
+
+#~ msgid "Discussion of specific tweaks"
+#~ msgstr "Discusión sobre trucos específicos"
+
+#~ msgid "old Contexts explained"
+#~ msgstr "antiguo Explicación de los contextos"
+
+#~ msgid "TODO moved into scheme"
+#~ msgstr "HACER trasladado al apartado sobre scheme"
+
+#~ msgid "Use 'bar-size to control the height of the tick,"
+#~ msgstr "Usar 'bar-size para controlar la altura del «tick»,"
+
+#~ msgid "and 'extra-offset to determine its position."
+#~ msgstr "y 'extra-offset para determinar su posición."
+
+#~ msgid "With 'extra-offset set to zero, the tick will be"
+#~ msgstr "Con 'extra-offset fijado a cero, el «tick» se centrará"
+
+#~ msgid "centered around the middle line of the staff."
+#~ msgstr "sobre la línea central del pentagrama."
+
+#~ msgid "Replace Staff.BarLine with Score.BarLine to"
+#~ msgstr "Sustituya Staff.BarLine con Score.BarLine para"
+
+#~ msgid "apply the method to the whole score."
+#~ msgstr "aplicar el método a toda la partitura."
+
+#~ msgid "Revert the overrides to get back a normal"
+#~ msgstr "Revertir las sobreescrituras para volver a tener una"
+
+#~ msgid "bar line at the end."
+#~ msgstr "barra normal de compás al final."
msgstr ""
"Project-Id-Version: fr\n"
"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
-"POT-Creation-Date: 2008-12-07 23:30+0100\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2008-12-20 13:08+0100\n"
"PO-Revision-Date: 2008-11-09 13:14+0100\n"
"Last-Translator: Jean-Charles Malahieude <lolyfan-AT-wanadoo-DOT-fr>\n"
"Language-Team: Français <lilypond-user-fr@gnu.org>\n"
#. Documentation/user/tutorial.itely:1791 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/working.itely:214 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/working.itely:229 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1035 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1078 (context id)
msgid "violin"
msgstr "violon"
#. @rglos in Documentation/es/user/chords.itely
#. @rglos in Documentation/de/user/tutorial.itely
#. @rglos in Documentation/de/user/simultaneous.itely
+#. @rglos in Documentation/de/user/chords.itely
msgid "chord"
msgstr "accord"
#. Documentation/user/vocal.itely:506 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/vocal.itely:1235 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/vocal.itely:1276 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:329 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:338 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:243 (context id)
#. input/lsr/adding-fingerings-to-tablatures.ly:16 (variable)
#. input/lsr/jazz-combo-template.ly:204 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1242 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:2646 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3469 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3475 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/simultaneous.itely:788 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/percussion.itely:497 (variable)
#. input/lsr/ancient-notation-template----modern-transcription-of-mensural-music.ly:46 (variable)
msgstr "SopMusique"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1298 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3471 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3477 (variable)
msgid "AltoMusic"
msgstr "AltoMusique"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1299 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3472 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3478 (variable)
msgid "TenorMusic"
msgstr "TenorMusique"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1300 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3473 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3479 (variable)
msgid "BassMusic"
msgstr "BasseMusique"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1301 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3474 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3480 (variable)
msgid "VerseOne"
msgstr "CoupletUn"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1303 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3475 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3481 (variable)
msgid "VerseTwo"
msgstr "CoupletDeux"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1305 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3476 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3482 (variable)
msgid "VerseThree"
msgstr "CoupletTrois"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1307 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3477 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3483 (variable)
msgid "VerseFour"
msgstr "CoupletQuatre"
msgstr "Sop"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1315 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3484 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3490 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:951 (context id)
msgid "Alto"
msgstr "Alto"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1323 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3492 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3498 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:953 (context id)
msgid "Tenor"
msgstr "Tenor"
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1324 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3493 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3499 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:958 (context id)
#. input/lsr/jazz-combo-template.ly:227 (variable)
msgid "Bass"
msgid "Building a score from scratch"
msgstr "Écriture d'une partition à partir de zéro"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:596 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:731 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:597 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:732 (comment)
msgid "Increase thickness of all following slurs from 1.2 to 5.0"
msgstr "L'épaisseur de toutes les liaisons à venir passe de 1,2 à 5,0"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:665 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:704 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:707 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:666 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:705 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:708 (comment)
msgid "Increase thickness of immediately following slur only"
msgstr "Épaississement de la prochaine liaison seulement"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:735 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:736 (comment)
msgid "Revert thickness of all following slurs to default of 1.2"
msgstr "Retour à l'épaisseur par défaut de 1,2 pour les prochaines liaisons"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1395 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1396 (comment)
msgid "Don't print clefs in this staff"
msgstr "pas de clef pour cette portée"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1397 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1398 (comment)
msgid "Don't print time signatures in this staff"
msgstr "pas de métrique pour cette portée"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1461 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1462 (comment)
msgid "Reduce all font sizes by ~24%"
msgstr "Réduction d'environ 24 % de toutes les tailles de fonte"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1527 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1528 (comment)
msgid "Reduce stem length and line spacing to match"
msgstr ""
"Réduction de la taille des hampes et de l'interligne pour ne pas déborder"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1957 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2027 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1958 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2028 (comment)
msgid "Set details for later Text Spanner"
msgstr "Réglage des détails du texte avec extension"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1960 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2030 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1961 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2031 (comment)
msgid "Place dynamics above staff"
msgstr "Positionnement des nuances au-dessus de la portée"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1962 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2034 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1963 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2035 (comment)
msgid "Start Ottava Bracket"
msgstr "Début du crochet d'octavation"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1965 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1972 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2037 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2044 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1966 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1973 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2038 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2045 (comment)
msgid "Add Dynamic Text"
msgstr "Ajout d'une nuance textuelle"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1967 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2039 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1968 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2040 (comment)
msgid "Add Dynamic Line Spanner"
msgstr "Ajout d'une nuance graphique"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1969 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2041 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1970 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2042 (comment)
msgid "Add Text Script"
msgstr "Ajout d'un commentaire textuel"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1974 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2046 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1975 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2047 (comment)
msgid "Stop Ottava Bracket"
msgstr "Fin du crochet d'octavation"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2032 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2033 (comment)
msgid "Place following Ottava Bracket below Text Spanners"
msgstr "Positionnement du crochet d'octavation sous le texte avec extension"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2094 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2095 (comment)
msgid "Cause notes to space out to accommodate text"
msgstr "Force les notes à s'espacer selon le texte"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2117 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2118 (comment)
msgid "This markup is short enough to fit without collision"
msgstr "Ce morceau de texte est assez court pour ne pas faire de collision"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2121 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2122 (comment)
msgid "This is too long to fit, so it is displaced upwards"
msgstr "Celui-ci est trop long pour tenir, il est déplacé vers le haut"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2125 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2130 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2126 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2131 (comment)
msgid "Turn off collision avoidance"
msgstr "Désactivation du processus d'évitement de collision"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2132 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2133 (comment)
msgid "and turn on textLengthOn"
msgstr "activation de textLengthOn"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2133 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2134 (comment)
msgid "Spaces at end are honored"
msgstr "Les espaces de la fin sont pris en compte"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2240 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2241 (comment)
msgid "Extend width by 1 staff space"
msgstr "Élargissement d'un espace"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2523 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2524 (comment)
msgid "This will not work, see below:"
msgstr "La commande suivante est sans résultat ; voir plus loin."
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2527 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2528 (comment)
msgid "This works:"
msgstr "Celle-ci produit le résultat escompté"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2578 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2579 (variable)
msgid "naturalplusflat"
msgstr "becarreplusbemol"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2619 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2620 (comment)
msgid "Extend width by 1 unit"
msgstr "Élargissement d'une unité"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2621 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2622 (comment)
msgid "Align dynamics to a base line 2 units above staff"
msgstr ""
"Alignement des nuances sur une ligne de base à 2 unités au-dessus de la "
"portée"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2925 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2974 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3035 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3105 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3170 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3230 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2926 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2975 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3036 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3106 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3171 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3231 (variable)
msgid "rhMusic"
msgstr "mdMusique"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2930 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2979 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3042 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3114 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3179 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2931 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2980 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3043 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3115 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3180 (comment)
msgid "Start polyphonic section of four voices"
msgstr "Début d'une section polyphonique de quatre voix"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2943 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2992 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3055 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3129 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3196 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3258 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2944 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2993 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3056 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3130 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3197 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3259 (variable)
msgid "lhMusic"
msgstr "mgMusique"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2952 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3001 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3064 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3138 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3205 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3267 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2953 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3002 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3065 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3139 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3206 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3268 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:964 (context id)
msgid "RH"
msgstr "MD"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2956 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3005 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3068 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3142 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3209 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3271 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2957 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3006 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3069 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3143 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3210 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3272 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:970 (context id)
msgid "LH"
msgstr "MG"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3183 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3245 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3184 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3246 (comment)
msgid "Move the c2 out of the main note column so the merge will work"
msgstr "Déplace le do2 pour que la fusion puisse fonctionner"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3186 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3248 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3187 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3249 (comment)
msgid "Stem on the d2 must be down to permit merging"
msgstr "La hampe du ré2 ira vers le bas pour permettre la fusion"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3243 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3244 (comment)
msgid "Reposition the c2 to the right of the merged note"
msgstr "Repositionnement du do2 à droite de la note fusionnée"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3379 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3401 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3380 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3402 (comment)
msgid "Visible tempo marking"
msgstr "Indication de tempo visible"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3383 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3405 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3384 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3406 (comment)
msgid "Invisible tempo marking to lengthen fermata in MIDI"
msgstr "Indication de tempo invisible ; utilisée pour le MIDI"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3386 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3408 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3387 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3409 (comment)
msgid "New tempo for next section"
msgstr "Nouveau tempo pour la section suivante"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3460 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3466 (variable)
msgid "emphasize"
msgstr "emphase"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3464 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3470 (variable)
msgid "normal"
msgstr "normal"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3470 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3476 (variable)
msgid "SopranoMusic"
msgstr "sopranoMusique"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3483 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3489 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:949 (context id)
msgid "Soprano"
msgstr "Soprano"
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3692 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3698 (comment)
msgid "Arrange to obtain color from color-notehead procedure"
msgstr "Arranger pour obtenir une couleur par la procédure color-notehead"
msgstr "Génération de fichiers LilyPond"
#. @top in Documentation/user/lilypond.tely
+#. @top in Documentation/de/user/lilypond.tely
msgid "GNU LilyPond --- Notation Reference"
msgstr "GNU LilyPond --- Manuel de notation"
msgid "Musical notation"
msgstr "Notation musicale générale"
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:666 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:688 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:1033 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:1052 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:1089 (variable)
msgid "music"
msgstr "musique"
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1039 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1082 (comment)
msgid "not strictly necessary, but a good reminder"
msgstr "pas strictement nécessaire, mais en pense-bête"
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1046 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1089 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/staff.itely:1076 (variable)
msgid "clarinet"
msgstr "clarinette"
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1130 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1174 (variable)
msgid "musicA"
msgstr "musiqueA"
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1144 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1188 (variable)
msgid "musicB"
msgstr "musiqueB"
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1163 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:171 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:265 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1207 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:175 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:274 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/percussion.itely:175 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/percussion.itely:365 (variable)
#. input/lsr/jazz-combo-template.ly:241 (variable)
msgid "up"
msgstr "haut"
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1167 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:181 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:274 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1211 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:185 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:283 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/percussion.itely:178 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/percussion.itely:366 (variable)
#. input/lsr/jazz-combo-template.ly:247 (variable)
msgid "Formatting cue notes"
msgstr "Mise en forme d'une citation"
-#. Documentation/user/editorial.itely:325 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/editorial.itely:326 (comment)
msgid "this is deliberate nonsense; note that the stems remain black"
msgstr "pour cette erreur manifeste, notez que les hampes restent en noir"
msgid "Printing stanzas at the end in multiple columns"
msgstr "Paroles sur plusieurs colonnes en fin de partition"
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:183 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:187 (comment)
msgid "keep staff alive"
msgstr "maintient la portée active"
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:266 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:275 (context id)
msgid "melOne"
msgstr "melodieUn"
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:335 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:344 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:244 (context id)
#. input/lsr/adding-fingerings-to-tablatures.ly:17 (variable)
#. input/lsr/jazz-combo-template.ly:205 (context id)
msgid "two"
msgstr "deux"
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:389 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:398 (comment)
msgid "stems may overlap the other staff"
msgstr "autorise les hampes à déborder sur l'autre portée"
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:391 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:400 (comment)
msgid "extend the stems to reach other other staff"
msgstr "étend les hampes pour qu'elles atteignent l'autre portée"
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:393 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:402 (comment)
msgid "do not print extra flags"
msgstr "pas de crochet superflu"
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:395 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:404 (comment)
msgid "prevent beaming as needed"
msgstr "on empêche la formation de la ligature automatique"
#. @node in Documentation/user/keyboards.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/keyboards.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/es/user/keyboards.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/keyboards.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/keyboards.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/keyboards.itely
#, fuzzy
-msgid "Harp notation"
-msgstr "Notation sur la portée"
+msgid "References for harps"
+msgstr "Généralités sur les instruments à clavier"
#. @node in Documentation/user/keyboards.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/keyboards.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/es/user/keyboards.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/keyboards.itely
#. @node in Documentation/de/user/keyboards.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/keyboards.itely
#, fuzzy
msgid "A chord for ukelele"
msgstr "Un accord pour ukulele"
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:770 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:793 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:822 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:851 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:875 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:919 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:782 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:805 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:834 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:865 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:889 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:935 (variable)
msgid "mychords"
msgstr "mesaccords"
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:797 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:809 (variable)
msgid "mychordlist"
msgstr "malistedaccords"
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:906 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:922 (comment)
msgid "add a new chord shape"
msgstr "ajout d'un nouveau canevas d'accord"
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:910 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:926 (comment)
msgid "add some new chords based on the power chord shape"
msgstr "ajout de nouveaux accords basés sur le nouveau canevas"
msgid "Bagpipe example"
msgstr "Exemple pour la cornemuse"
-#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:654 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:663 (variable)
msgid "myChords"
msgstr "mesAccords"
-#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:984 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:1005 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:993 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:1014 (comment)
msgid "Put notes on same Staff as figures"
msgstr "Assemblage des notes et de la basse chiffrée sur une même portée"
-#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:1068 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:1077 (comment)
msgid "The extenders are correct here, with the same rhythm as the bass"
msgstr ""
"Les prolongateurs sont corrects, ils suivent bien le rythme de la basse"
-#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:1080 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:1089 (comment)
msgid "The extenders are incorrect here, even though the timing is the same"
msgstr "Les prolongateurs sont erronés, bien que le rythme soit le même"
#. @rglos in Documentation/user/chords.itely
#. @rglos in Documentation/es/user/chords.itely
+#. @rglos in Documentation/de/user/chords.itely
msgid "figured bass"
msgstr "basse chiffrée"
msgid "now they will collide"
msgstr "il y a maintenant chevauchement"
-#. Documentation/user/spacing.itely:1788 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/spacing.itely:1789 (comment)
msgid "the markup is too close to the following note"
msgstr "le texte est trop proche de la note qui suit"
-#. Documentation/user/spacing.itely:1791 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/spacing.itely:1793 (comment)
msgid "setting outside-staff-horizontal-padding fixes this"
msgstr "définir outside-staff-horizontal-padding règle le problème"
#. @subsection in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @subsection in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Staff symbol properties"
msgstr "Propriétés des lignes de portée"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{spanner-interface}"
msgstr "Utilisation de @code{spanner-interface}"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{line-spanner-interface}"
msgstr "Utilisation de @code{line-spanner-interface}"
#. @subsection in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @subsection in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Visibility of objects"
msgstr "Visibilité des objets"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Rotating layout objects"
msgstr "Rotation des objets de mise en forme"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Rotating markup"
msgstr "Rotation des étiquettes"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Setting @code{X-offset} and @code{Y-offset} directly"
msgstr "Détermination directe de @code{X-offset} et @code{Y-offset}"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{side-position-interface}"
msgstr "Utilisation de @code{side-position-interface}"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{self-alignment-interface}"
msgstr "Utilisation de @code{self-alignment-interface}"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{aligned-on-parent} procedures"
msgstr "Utilisation des procédures @code{aligned-on-parent}"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{centered-on-parent} procedures"
msgstr "Utilisation des procédures @code{centered-on-parent}"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{break-aligned-interface}"
msgstr "Utilisation de @code{break-aligned-interface}"
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Modifying ties and slurs"
msgstr "Modification des liaisons"
#. @section in Documentation/user/programming-interface.itely
#. @subsection in Documentation/fr/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @section in Documentation/es/user/programming-interface.itely
-#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
+#. @section in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
msgid "Using Scheme code instead of @code{\\tweak}"
msgstr "Utilisation de code Scheme au lieu de @code{\\tweak}"
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/programming-interface.itely
#. @section in Documentation/es/user/programming-interface.itely
#. @node in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
-#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
+#. @section in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
msgid "Difficult tweaks"
msgstr "Retouches complexes"
msgid "GNU LilyPond -- Programmbenutzung"
msgstr "GNU LilyPond --- utilisation du programme"
-#. @top in Documentation/de/user/lilypond.tely
-#, fuzzy
-msgid "GNU LilyPond -- Notationsreferenz"
-msgstr "GNU LilyPond --- Manuel de notation"
-
#. @chapheading in Documentation/de/user/lilypond.tely
msgid "Das Notensatzprogramm"
msgstr ""
msgid "Ignorieren von Melismen"
msgstr "Désactivation du traitement des mélismes"
-#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-#. @section in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-msgid "Common properties"
-msgstr "Propriétés couramment utilisées"
-
-#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-msgid "Controlling visibility of objects"
-msgstr "Contrôle de la visibilité des objets"
-
-#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-msgid "Modifying ends of spanners"
-msgstr "Modification de la terminaison des extenseurs"
-
-#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-#. @section in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-msgid "Discussion of specific tweaks"
-msgstr "Considération de certaines retouches spécifiques"
-
-#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-msgid "old Contexts explained"
-msgstr "ex Tout savoir sur les contextes"
-
-#. @node in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
-#. @section in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
-msgid "TODO moved into scheme"
-msgstr ""
-
#. input/lsr/accordion-discant-symbols.ly:34 (variable)
#, fuzzy
msgid "discant"
msgid "Test it:"
msgstr "Commentaires textuels"
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:21 (comment)
-msgid "Use 'bar-size to control the height of the tick,"
-msgstr ""
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:22 (comment)
-msgid "and 'extra-offset to determine its position."
-msgstr ""
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:24 (comment)
-msgid "With 'extra-offset set to zero, the tick will be"
-msgstr ""
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:25 (comment)
-msgid "centered around the middle line of the staff."
-msgstr ""
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:27 (comment)
-msgid "Replace Staff.BarLine with Score.BarLine to"
-msgstr ""
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:28 (comment)
-msgid "apply the method to the whole score."
-msgstr ""
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:38 (comment)
-msgid "Revert the overrides to get back a normal"
-msgstr ""
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:39 (comment)
-msgid "bar line at the end."
-msgstr ""
-
#. input/lsr/transcription-of-ancient-music-with-incipit.ly:127 (variable)
#, fuzzy
msgid "incipitDiscantus"
msgid "Table of Contents"
msgstr "Table des matières"
+#, fuzzy
+#~ msgid "Harp notation"
+#~ msgstr "Notation sur la portée"
+
+#, fuzzy
+#~ msgid "GNU LilyPond -- Notationsreferenz"
+#~ msgstr "GNU LilyPond --- Manuel de notation"
+
+#~ msgid "Common properties"
+#~ msgstr "Propriétés couramment utilisées"
+
+#~ msgid "Controlling visibility of objects"
+#~ msgstr "Contrôle de la visibilité des objets"
+
+#~ msgid "Modifying ends of spanners"
+#~ msgstr "Modification de la terminaison des extenseurs"
+
+#~ msgid "Discussion of specific tweaks"
+#~ msgstr "Considération de certaines retouches spécifiques"
+
+#~ msgid "old Contexts explained"
+#~ msgstr "ex Tout savoir sur les contextes"
+
#~ msgid "applies to \\\"fas\\\""
#~ msgstr "s'applique à \\\"fas\\\""
msgstr ""
"Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\n"
"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
-"POT-Creation-Date: 2008-12-07 23:30+0100\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2008-12-20 13:08+0100\n"
"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
"Last-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\n"
"Language-Team: LANGUAGE <LL@li.org>\n"
#. Documentation/user/tutorial.itely:1791 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/working.itely:214 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/working.itely:229 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1035 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1078 (context id)
msgid "violin"
msgstr ""
#. @rglos in Documentation/es/user/chords.itely
#. @rglos in Documentation/de/user/tutorial.itely
#. @rglos in Documentation/de/user/simultaneous.itely
+#. @rglos in Documentation/de/user/chords.itely
msgid "chord"
msgstr ""
#. Documentation/user/vocal.itely:506 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/vocal.itely:1235 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/vocal.itely:1276 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:329 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:338 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:243 (context id)
#. input/lsr/adding-fingerings-to-tablatures.ly:16 (variable)
#. input/lsr/jazz-combo-template.ly:204 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1242 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:2646 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3469 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3475 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/simultaneous.itely:788 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/percussion.itely:497 (variable)
#. input/lsr/ancient-notation-template----modern-transcription-of-mensural-music.ly:46 (variable)
msgstr ""
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1298 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3471 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3477 (variable)
msgid "AltoMusic"
msgstr ""
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1299 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3472 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3478 (variable)
msgid "TenorMusic"
msgstr ""
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1300 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3473 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3479 (variable)
msgid "BassMusic"
msgstr ""
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1301 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3474 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3480 (variable)
msgid "VerseOne"
msgstr ""
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1303 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3475 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3481 (variable)
msgid "VerseTwo"
msgstr ""
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1305 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3476 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3482 (variable)
msgid "VerseThree"
msgstr ""
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1307 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3477 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3483 (variable)
msgid "VerseFour"
msgstr ""
msgstr ""
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1315 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3484 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3490 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:951 (context id)
msgid "Alto"
msgstr ""
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1323 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3492 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3498 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:953 (context id)
msgid "Tenor"
msgstr ""
#. Documentation/user/fundamental.itely:1324 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3493 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3499 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:958 (context id)
#. input/lsr/jazz-combo-template.ly:227 (variable)
msgid "Bass"
msgid "Building a score from scratch"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:596 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:731 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:597 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:732 (comment)
msgid "Increase thickness of all following slurs from 1.2 to 5.0"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:665 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:704 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:707 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:666 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:705 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:708 (comment)
msgid "Increase thickness of immediately following slur only"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:735 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:736 (comment)
msgid "Revert thickness of all following slurs to default of 1.2"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1395 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1396 (comment)
msgid "Don't print clefs in this staff"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1397 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1398 (comment)
msgid "Don't print time signatures in this staff"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1461 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1462 (comment)
msgid "Reduce all font sizes by ~24%"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1527 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1528 (comment)
msgid "Reduce stem length and line spacing to match"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1957 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2027 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1958 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2028 (comment)
msgid "Set details for later Text Spanner"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1960 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2030 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1961 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2031 (comment)
msgid "Place dynamics above staff"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1962 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2034 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1963 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2035 (comment)
msgid "Start Ottava Bracket"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1965 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1972 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2037 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2044 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1966 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1973 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2038 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2045 (comment)
msgid "Add Dynamic Text"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1967 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2039 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1968 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2040 (comment)
msgid "Add Dynamic Line Spanner"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1969 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2041 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1970 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2042 (comment)
msgid "Add Text Script"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1974 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2046 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:1975 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2047 (comment)
msgid "Stop Ottava Bracket"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2032 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2033 (comment)
msgid "Place following Ottava Bracket below Text Spanners"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2094 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2095 (comment)
msgid "Cause notes to space out to accommodate text"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2117 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2118 (comment)
msgid "This markup is short enough to fit without collision"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2121 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2122 (comment)
msgid "This is too long to fit, so it is displaced upwards"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2125 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2130 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2126 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2131 (comment)
msgid "Turn off collision avoidance"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2132 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2133 (comment)
msgid "and turn on textLengthOn"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2133 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2134 (comment)
msgid "Spaces at end are honored"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2240 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2241 (comment)
msgid "Extend width by 1 staff space"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2523 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2524 (comment)
msgid "This will not work, see below:"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2527 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2528 (comment)
msgid "This works:"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2578 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2579 (variable)
msgid "naturalplusflat"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2619 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2620 (comment)
msgid "Extend width by 1 unit"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2621 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2622 (comment)
msgid "Align dynamics to a base line 2 units above staff"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2925 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2974 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3035 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3105 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3170 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3230 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2926 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2975 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3036 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3106 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3171 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3231 (variable)
msgid "rhMusic"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2930 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2979 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3042 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3114 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3179 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2931 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2980 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3043 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3115 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3180 (comment)
msgid "Start polyphonic section of four voices"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2943 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2992 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3055 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3129 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3196 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3258 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2944 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2993 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3056 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3130 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3197 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3259 (variable)
msgid "lhMusic"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2952 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3001 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3064 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3138 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3205 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3267 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2953 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3002 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3065 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3139 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3206 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3268 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:964 (context id)
msgid "RH"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2956 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3005 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3068 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3142 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3209 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3271 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:2957 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3006 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3069 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3143 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3210 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3272 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:970 (context id)
msgid "LH"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3183 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3245 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3184 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3246 (comment)
msgid "Move the c2 out of the main note column so the merge will work"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3186 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3248 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3187 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3249 (comment)
msgid "Stem on the d2 must be down to permit merging"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3243 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3244 (comment)
msgid "Reposition the c2 to the right of the merged note"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3379 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3401 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3380 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3402 (comment)
msgid "Visible tempo marking"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3383 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3405 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3384 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3406 (comment)
msgid "Invisible tempo marking to lengthen fermata in MIDI"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3386 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3408 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3387 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3409 (comment)
msgid "New tempo for next section"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3460 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3466 (variable)
msgid "emphasize"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3464 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3470 (variable)
msgid "normal"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3470 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3476 (variable)
msgid "SopranoMusic"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3483 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3489 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:949 (context id)
msgid "Soprano"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3692 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/tweaks.itely:3698 (comment)
msgid "Arrange to obtain color from color-notehead procedure"
msgstr ""
msgstr ""
#. @top in Documentation/user/lilypond.tely
+#. @top in Documentation/de/user/lilypond.tely
msgid "GNU LilyPond --- Notation Reference"
msgstr ""
msgid "Musical notation"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:666 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:688 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:1033 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:1052 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/input.itely:1089 (variable)
msgid "music"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1039 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1082 (comment)
msgid "not strictly necessary, but a good reminder"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1046 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1089 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/staff.itely:1076 (variable)
msgid "clarinet"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1130 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1174 (variable)
msgid "musicA"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1144 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1188 (variable)
msgid "musicB"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1163 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:171 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:265 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1207 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:175 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:274 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/percussion.itely:175 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/percussion.itely:365 (variable)
#. input/lsr/jazz-combo-template.ly:241 (variable)
msgid "up"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1167 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:181 (context id)
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:274 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/pitches.itely:1211 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:185 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:283 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/percussion.itely:178 (variable)
#. Documentation/user/percussion.itely:366 (variable)
#. input/lsr/jazz-combo-template.ly:247 (variable)
msgid "Formatting cue notes"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/editorial.itely:325 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/editorial.itely:326 (comment)
msgid "this is deliberate nonsense; note that the stems remain black"
msgstr ""
msgid "Printing stanzas at the end in multiple columns"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:183 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:187 (comment)
msgid "keep staff alive"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:266 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:275 (context id)
msgid "melOne"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:335 (context id)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:344 (context id)
#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:244 (context id)
#. input/lsr/adding-fingerings-to-tablatures.ly:17 (variable)
#. input/lsr/jazz-combo-template.ly:205 (context id)
msgid "two"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:389 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:398 (comment)
msgid "stems may overlap the other staff"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:391 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:400 (comment)
msgid "extend the stems to reach other other staff"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:393 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:402 (comment)
msgid "do not print extra flags"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:395 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/keyboards.itely:404 (comment)
msgid "prevent beaming as needed"
msgstr ""
#. @node in Documentation/user/keyboards.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/keyboards.itely
-msgid "Harp notation"
+#. @node in Documentation/es/user/keyboards.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/keyboards.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/keyboards.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/keyboards.itely
+msgid "References for harps"
msgstr ""
#. @node in Documentation/user/keyboards.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/keyboards.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/es/user/keyboards.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/keyboards.itely
#. @node in Documentation/de/user/keyboards.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/keyboards.itely
msgid "Harp pedals"
msgid "A chord for ukelele"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:770 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:793 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:822 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:851 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:875 (variable)
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:919 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:782 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:805 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:834 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:865 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:889 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:935 (variable)
msgid "mychords"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:797 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:809 (variable)
msgid "mychordlist"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:906 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:922 (comment)
msgid "add a new chord shape"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:910 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/fretted-strings.itely:926 (comment)
msgid "add some new chords based on the power chord shape"
msgstr ""
msgid "Bagpipe example"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:654 (variable)
+#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:663 (variable)
msgid "myChords"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:984 (comment)
-#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:1005 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:993 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:1014 (comment)
msgid "Put notes on same Staff as figures"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:1068 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:1077 (comment)
msgid "The extenders are correct here, with the same rhythm as the bass"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:1080 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/chords.itely:1089 (comment)
msgid "The extenders are incorrect here, even though the timing is the same"
msgstr ""
#. @rglos in Documentation/user/chords.itely
#. @rglos in Documentation/es/user/chords.itely
+#. @rglos in Documentation/de/user/chords.itely
msgid "figured bass"
msgstr ""
msgid "now they will collide"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/spacing.itely:1788 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/spacing.itely:1789 (comment)
msgid "the markup is too close to the following note"
msgstr ""
-#. Documentation/user/spacing.itely:1791 (comment)
+#. Documentation/user/spacing.itely:1793 (comment)
msgid "setting outside-staff-horizontal-padding fixes this"
msgstr ""
#. @subsection in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @subsection in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Staff symbol properties"
msgstr ""
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{spanner-interface}"
msgstr ""
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{line-spanner-interface}"
msgstr ""
#. @subsection in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @subsection in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Visibility of objects"
msgstr ""
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Rotating layout objects"
msgstr ""
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Rotating markup"
msgstr ""
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Setting @code{X-offset} and @code{Y-offset} directly"
msgstr ""
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{side-position-interface}"
msgstr ""
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{self-alignment-interface}"
msgstr ""
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{aligned-on-parent} procedures"
msgstr ""
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{centered-on-parent} procedures"
msgstr ""
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Using the @code{break-aligned-interface}"
msgstr ""
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/es/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
+#. @unnumberedsubsubsec in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
msgid "Modifying ties and slurs"
msgstr ""
#. @section in Documentation/user/programming-interface.itely
#. @subsection in Documentation/fr/user/changing-defaults.itely
#. @section in Documentation/es/user/programming-interface.itely
-#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
+#. @section in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
msgid "Using Scheme code instead of @code{\\tweak}"
msgstr ""
#. @node in Documentation/es/user/programming-interface.itely
#. @section in Documentation/es/user/programming-interface.itely
#. @node in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
-#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
+#. @section in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
msgid "Difficult tweaks"
msgstr ""
msgid "GNU LilyPond -- Programmbenutzung"
msgstr ""
-#. @top in Documentation/de/user/lilypond.tely
-msgid "GNU LilyPond -- Notationsreferenz"
-msgstr ""
-
#. @chapheading in Documentation/de/user/lilypond.tely
msgid "Das Notensatzprogramm"
msgstr ""
msgid "Ignorieren von Melismen"
msgstr ""
-#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-#. @section in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-msgid "Common properties"
-msgstr ""
-
-#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-msgid "Controlling visibility of objects"
-msgstr ""
-
-#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-msgid "Modifying ends of spanners"
-msgstr ""
-
-#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-#. @section in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-msgid "Discussion of specific tweaks"
-msgstr ""
-
-#. @node in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-#. @subsection in Documentation/de/user/changing-defaults.itely
-msgid "old Contexts explained"
-msgstr ""
-
-#. @node in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
-#. @section in Documentation/de/user/programming-interface.itely
-msgid "TODO moved into scheme"
-msgstr ""
-
#. input/lsr/accordion-discant-symbols.ly:34 (variable)
msgid "discant"
msgstr ""
msgid "Test it:"
msgstr ""
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:21 (comment)
-msgid "Use 'bar-size to control the height of the tick,"
-msgstr ""
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:22 (comment)
-msgid "and 'extra-offset to determine its position."
-msgstr ""
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:24 (comment)
-msgid "With 'extra-offset set to zero, the tick will be"
-msgstr ""
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:25 (comment)
-msgid "centered around the middle line of the staff."
-msgstr ""
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:27 (comment)
-msgid "Replace Staff.BarLine with Score.BarLine to"
-msgstr ""
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:28 (comment)
-msgid "apply the method to the whole score."
-msgstr ""
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:38 (comment)
-msgid "Revert the overrides to get back a normal"
-msgstr ""
-
-#. input/lsr/tick-bar-lines.ly:39 (comment)
-msgid "bar line at the end."
-msgstr ""
-
#. input/lsr/transcription-of-ancient-music-with-incipit.ly:127 (variable)
msgid "incipitDiscantus"
msgstr ""
is finished.
</p>
- <p><i>Last updated Tue Dec 9 09:40:49 UTC 2008
+ <p><i>Last updated Sat Dec 20 11:59:00 UTC 2008
</i></p>
<table align="center" border="2">
<tr align="center">
<td>Till Rettig<br>
Reinhold Kainhofer<br>
<span style="background-color: #1fff1f">translated</span><br>
- <span style="background-color: #2cff20">partially up to date</span><br>
+ <span style="background-color: #1fff1f">up to date</span><br>
</td>
<td>Francisco Vila<br>
<span style="background-color: #1fff1f">translated</span><br>
Jean-Charles Malahieude<br>
<small>John Mandereau</small><br>
<span style="background-color: #1fff1f">translated</span><br>
- <span style="background-color: #47ff24">partially up to date</span><br>
+ <span style="background-color: #4efe25">partially up to date</span><br>
</td>
<td>Till Rettig<br>
Reinhold Kainhofer<br>
</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>4 Tweaking output<br>(14581)</td>
+ <td>4 Tweaking output<br>(14647)</td>
<td>Valentin Villenave<br>
Nicolas Klutchnikoff<br>
Damien Heurtebise<br>
<td>Reinhold Kainhofer<br>
Till Rettig<br>
<span style="background-color: #1fff1f">translated</span><br>
- <span style="background-color: #2cff20">partially up to date</span><br>
+ <span style="background-color: #1fff1f">up to date</span><br>
</td>
<td>Francisco Vila<br>
<span style="background-color: #1fff1f">translated</span><br>
</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>4 @command{lilypond-book}: Integrating text and music<br>(3185)</td>
+ <td>4 @command{lilypond-book}: Integrating text and music<br>(3248)</td>
<td> <span style="background-color: #d0f0f8">not translated</span><br>
</td>
<td>Reinhold Kainhofer<br>
</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>1.1 Pitches<br>(3086)</td>
+ <td>1.1 Pitches<br>(3123)</td>
<td>Frédéric Chiasson<br>
<small>Valentin Villenave<br>
Jean-Charles Malahieude</small><br>
</td>
<td>Till Rettig<br>
<span style="background-color: #1fff1f">translated</span><br>
- <span style="background-color: #1fff1f">up to date</span><br>
+ <span style="background-color: #25fe1f">partially up to date</span><br>
</td>
<td>Francisco Vila<br>
<span style="background-color: #1fff1f">translated</span><br>
</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>1.7 Editorial annotations<br>(906)</td>
+ <td>1.7 Editorial annotations<br>(895)</td>
<td>Jean-Charles Malahieude<br>
<span style="background-color: #1fff1f">translated</span><br>
<span style="background-color: #ff6f57">partially up to date</span><br>
</td>
<td>Till Rettig<br>
<span style="background-color: #1fff1f">translated</span><br>
- <span style="background-color: #25fe1f">partially up to date</span><br>
+ <span style="background-color: #1fff1f">up to date</span><br>
</td>
<td>Francisco Vila<br>
<span style="background-color: #1fff1f">translated</span><br>
</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>2.2 Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments<br>(725)</td>
+ <td>2.2 Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments<br>(744)</td>
<td>Valentin Villenave<br>
<small>Jean-Charles Malahieude<br>
John Mandereau</small><br>
- <span style="background-color: #dfef77">partially translated (89 %)</span><br>
- <span style="background-color: #ff6d58">partially up to date</span><br>
+ <span style="background-color: #1fff1f">translated</span><br>
+ <span style="background-color: #1fff1f">up to date</span><br>
</td>
<td>Till Rettig<br>
<span style="background-color: #1fff1f">translated</span><br>
</td>
<td>Till Rettig<br>
<span style="background-color: #1fff1f">translated</span><br>
- <span style="background-color: #25fe1f">partially up to date</span><br>
+ <span style="background-color: #1fff1f">up to date</span><br>
</td>
<td>Francisco Vila<br>
<span style="background-color: #1fff1f">translated</span><br>
</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>2.4 Fretted string instruments<br>(1759)</td>
+ <td>2.4 Fretted string instruments<br>(1830)</td>
<td>Valentin Villenave<br>
<small>Jean-Charles Malahieude<br>
John Mandereau</small><br>
</td>
<td>Till Rettig<br>
<span style="background-color: #1fff1f">translated</span><br>
- <span style="background-color: #1fff1f">up to date</span><br>
+ <span style="background-color: #25fe1f">partially up to date</span><br>
</td>
<td>Francisco Vila<br>
<span style="background-color: #1fff1f">translated</span><br>
</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>2.7 Chord notation<br>(1333)</td>
+ <td>2.7 Chord notation<br>(1398)</td>
<td>Valentin Villenave<br>
<small>Jean-Charles Malahieude<br>
John Mandereau</small><br>
- <span style="background-color: #dfef77">partially translated (64 %)</span><br>
+ <span style="background-color: #dfef77">partially translated (61 %)</span><br>
<span style="background-color: #ff6f57">partially up to date</span><br>
</td>
<td>Till Rettig<br>
- <span style="background-color: #dfef77">partially translated (64 %)</span><br>
- <span style="background-color: #ff6f57">partially up to date</span><br>
+ <span style="background-color: #1fff1f">translated</span><br>
+ <span style="background-color: #1fff1f">up to date</span><br>
</td>
<td>Francisco Vila<br>
<span style="background-color: #1fff1f">translated</span><br>
</td>
<td>Till Rettig<br>
<span style="background-color: #dfef77">partially translated (79 %)</span><br>
- <span style="background-color: #ff6d58">partially up to date</span><br>
+ <span style="background-color: #1fff1f">up to date</span><br>
</td>
<td>Francisco Vila<br>
<span style="background-color: #1fff1f">translated</span><br>
<td>2.9 World music<br>(1115)</td>
<td> <span style="background-color: #d0f0f8">not translated</span><br>
</td>
- <td> <span style="background-color: #d0f0f8">not translated</span><br>
+ <td>Till Rettig<br>
+ <span style="background-color: #1fff1f">translated</span><br>
+ <span style="background-color: #1fff1f">up to date</span><br>
</td>
<td>Francisco Vila<br>
<span style="background-color: #1fff1f">translated</span><br>
</td>
<td>Till Rettig<br>
<span style="background-color: #dfef77">partially translated (5 %)</span><br>
- <span style="background-color: #ff8353">partially up to date</span><br>
+ <span style="background-color: #1fff1f">up to date</span><br>
</td>
<td>Francisco Vila<br>
<span style="background-color: #1fff1f">translated</span><br>
</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>4 Spacing issues<br>(8444)</td>
+ <td>4 Spacing issues<br>(8451)</td>
<td>Frédéric Chiasson<br>
Jean-Charles Malahieude<br>
<span style="background-color: #dfef77">partially translated (19 %)</span><br>
- <span style="background-color: #fff73e">partially up to date</span><br>
+ <span style="background-color: #fff53e">partially up to date</span><br>
</td>
<td>Till Rettig<br>
<span style="background-color: #dfef77">partially translated (3 %)</span><br>
- <span style="background-color: #fff73e">partially up to date</span><br>
+ <span style="background-color: #1fff1f">up to date</span><br>
</td>
<td>Francisco Vila<br>
<span style="background-color: #1fff1f">translated</span><br>
</td>
</tr>
<tr align="left">
- <td>B Notation manual tables<br>(1155)</td>
+ <td>B Notation manual tables<br>(1190)</td>
<td>Frédéric Chiasson<br>
Jean-Charles Malahieude<br>
<span style="background-color: #dfef77">partially translated (7 %)</span><br>
- <span style="background-color: #e8fe39">partially up to date</span><br>
+ <span style="background-color: #efff3a">partially up to date</span><br>
</td>
<td>Till Rettig<br>
<span style="background-color: #1fff1f">translated</span><br>
- <span style="background-color: #1fff1f">up to date</span><br>
+ <span style="background-color: #25fe1f">partially up to date</span><br>
</td>
<td>Francisco Vila<br>
<span style="background-color: #1fff1f">translated</span><br>
</td>
<td>Till Rettig<br>
<span style="background-color: #1fff1f">translated</span><br>
- <span style="background-color: #33ff21">partially up to date</span><br>
+ <span style="background-color: #1fff1f">up to date</span><br>
</td>
<td>Francisco Vila<br>
<span style="background-color: #1fff1f">translated</span><br>
printf ("\n");
printf (Long_option_init::table_string (options_static).c_str ());
printf ("\n");
+ /* Translators, please translate this string as
+ "Report bugs in English via %s",
+ or if there is a LilyPond users list or forum in your language
+ "Report bugs in English via %s or in YOUR_LANG via URI" */
printf (_f ("Report bugs via %s",
"http://post.gmane.org/post.php?group=gmane.comp.gnu.lilypond.bugs"
).c_str ());
{
vsize end = last_break_position ();
- message ("Computing line breaks...");
+ message (_ ("Calculating line breaks..."));
set_to_ideal_line_configuration (0, end);
break_into_pieces (0, end, current_configuration (0));
- message (_ ("Computing page breaks..."));
+ message (_ ("Calculating page breaks..."));
vsize first_page_num = robust_scm2int (book_->paper_->c_variable ("first-page-number"), 1);
Page_spacing_result res = pack_systems_on_least_pages (0, first_page_num);
SCM lines = systems ();
'Back to Documentation Index' => 'Retour à l\'accueil de la documentation',
};
$LY_LANGUAGES->{'es'} = {
- 'Back to Documentation Index' => '',
+ 'Back to Documentation Index' => 'Volver al índice de la documentación',
};
$LY_LANGUAGES->{'de'} = {
'Back to Documentation Index' => '',
#
msgid ""
msgstr ""
-"Project-Id-Version: lilypond 2.11.57\n"
+"Project-Id-Version: lilypond 2.12.0\n"
"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: http://post.gmane.org/post.php?group=gmane.comp.gnu.lilypond.bugs\n"
-"POT-Creation-Date: 2008-12-09 11:43+0100\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2008-12-20 11:58+0100\n"
"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
"Last-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\n"
"Language-Team: LANGUAGE <LL@li.org>\n"
"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
-"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=CHARSET\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
#: convertrules.py:12
msgid "re-definition of InnerChoirStaff.\n"
msgstr ""
+#: convertrules.py:2851
+msgid "stringTuning must be added to addChordShape call.\n"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: convertrules.py:2857
+msgid "stringTuning must be added to chord-shape call.\n"
+msgstr ""
+
#: fontextract.py:25
#, python-format
msgid "Scanning %s"
msgid "preserve ABC's notion of beams"
msgstr ""
+#. Translators, please translate this string as
+#. "Report bugs in English via %s",
+#. or if there is a LilyPond users list or forum in your language
+#. "Report bugs in English via %s or in YOUR_LANG via URI"
#: abc2ly.py:1363 convert-ly.py:123 etf2ly.py:1200 lilypond-book.py:214
-#: midi2ly.py:894 musicxml2ly.py:2646 main.cc:261
+#: midi2ly.py:894 musicxml2ly.py:2646 main.cc:265
#, c-format, python-format
msgid "Report bugs via %s"
msgstr ""
msgid "be verbose"
msgstr ""
-#: lilypond-book.py:869
+#: lilypond-book.py:871
#, python-format
msgid "file not found: %s"
msgstr ""
-#: lilypond-book.py:1137
+#: lilypond-book.py:1142
#, python-format
msgid "deprecated ly-option used: %s=%s"
msgstr ""
-#: lilypond-book.py:1139
+#: lilypond-book.py:1144
#, python-format
msgid "compatibility mode translation: %s=%s"
msgstr ""
-#: lilypond-book.py:1142
+#: lilypond-book.py:1147
#, python-format
msgid "deprecated ly-option used: %s"
msgstr ""
-#: lilypond-book.py:1144
+#: lilypond-book.py:1149
#, python-format
msgid "compatibility mode translation: %s"
msgstr ""
-#: lilypond-book.py:1162
+#: lilypond-book.py:1167
#, python-format
msgid "ignoring unknown ly option: %s"
msgstr ""
-#: lilypond-book.py:1598
+#: lilypond-book.py:1604
#, python-format
msgid "Opening filter `%s'"
msgstr ""
-#: lilypond-book.py:1615
+#: lilypond-book.py:1621
#, python-format
msgid "`%s' failed (%d)"
msgstr ""
-#: lilypond-book.py:1616
+#: lilypond-book.py:1622
msgid "The error log is as follows:"
msgstr ""
-#: lilypond-book.py:1678
+#: lilypond-book.py:1684
msgid "cannot find \\begin{document} in LaTeX document"
msgstr ""
-#: lilypond-book.py:1778
+#: lilypond-book.py:1784
msgid "Writing snippets..."
msgstr ""
-#: lilypond-book.py:1784
+#: lilypond-book.py:1790
msgid "Processing..."
msgstr ""
-#: lilypond-book.py:1790
+#: lilypond-book.py:1796
msgid "All snippets are up to date..."
msgstr ""
-#: lilypond-book.py:1824
+#: lilypond-book.py:1830
#, python-format
msgid "cannot determine format for: %s"
msgstr ""
-#: lilypond-book.py:1835
+#: lilypond-book.py:1841
#, python-format
msgid "%s is up to date."
msgstr ""
-#: lilypond-book.py:1849
+#: lilypond-book.py:1855
#, python-format
msgid "Writing `%s'..."
msgstr ""
-#: lilypond-book.py:1907
+#: lilypond-book.py:1913
msgid "Output would overwrite input file; use --output."
msgstr ""
-#: lilypond-book.py:1911
+#: lilypond-book.py:1917
#, python-format
msgid "Reading %s..."
msgstr ""
-#: lilypond-book.py:1931
+#: lilypond-book.py:1937
msgid "Dissecting..."
msgstr ""
-#: lilypond-book.py:1947
+#: lilypond-book.py:1953
#, python-format
msgid "Compiling %s..."
msgstr ""
-#: lilypond-book.py:1956
+#: lilypond-book.py:1962
#, python-format
msgid "Processing include: %s"
msgstr ""
-#: lilypond-book.py:1968
+#: lilypond-book.py:1974
#, python-format
msgid "Removing `%s'"
msgstr ""
msgid "unterminated extender"
msgstr ""
-#: font-config.cc:28
-msgid "Initializing FontConfig..."
+#: font-config-scheme.cc:140 font-config.cc:57
+#, c-format
+msgid "failed adding font directory: %s"
msgstr ""
-#: font-config.cc:44
+#: font-config-scheme.cc:142 font-config.cc:59
#, c-format
-msgid "Rebuilding FontConfig cache %s, this may take a while..."
+msgid "adding font directory: %s"
msgstr ""
-#: font-config.cc:57
+#: font-config-scheme.cc:156
#, c-format
-msgid "failed adding font directory: %s"
+msgid "failed adding font file: %s"
msgstr ""
-#: font-config.cc:59
+#: font-config-scheme.cc:158
#, c-format
-msgid "adding font directory: %s"
+msgid "adding font file: %s"
+msgstr ""
+
+#: font-config.cc:28
+msgid "Initializing FontConfig..."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: font-config.cc:44
+#, c-format
+msgid "Rebuilding FontConfig cache %s, this may take a while..."
msgstr ""
#: font-config.cc:63
msgid "Options:"
msgstr ""
-#: main.cc:307
+#: main.cc:311
#, c-format
msgid "expected %d arguments with jail, found: %u"
msgstr ""
-#: main.cc:321
+#: main.cc:325
#, c-format
msgid "no such user: %s"
msgstr ""
-#: main.cc:323
+#: main.cc:327
#, c-format
msgid "cannot get user id from user name: %s: %s"
msgstr ""
-#: main.cc:338
+#: main.cc:342
#, c-format
msgid "no such group: %s"
msgstr ""
-#: main.cc:340
+#: main.cc:344
#, c-format
msgid "cannot get group id from group name: %s: %s"
msgstr ""
-#: main.cc:348
+#: main.cc:352
#, c-format
msgid "cannot chroot to: %s: %s"
msgstr ""
-#: main.cc:355
+#: main.cc:359
#, c-format
msgid "cannot change group id to: %d: %s"
msgstr ""
-#: main.cc:361
+#: main.cc:365
#, c-format
msgid "cannot change user id to: %d: %s"
msgstr ""
-#: main.cc:367
+#: main.cc:371
#, c-format
msgid "cannot change working directory to: %s: %s"
msgstr ""
-#: main.cc:607
+#: main.cc:611
#, c-format
msgid "exception caught: %s"
msgstr ""
msgid "cannot write to file: `%s'"
msgstr ""
-#: minimal-page-breaking.cc:42
-msgid "Computing page breaks..."
+#: minimal-page-breaking.cc:38 paper-score.cc:105
+msgid "Calculating line breaks..."
+msgstr ""
+
+#: minimal-page-breaking.cc:42 layout-page-layout.scm:463
+msgid "Calculating page breaks..."
msgstr ""
#: music-iterator.cc:171
msgid "Layout output to `%s'..."
msgstr ""
-#: paper-score.cc:105
-msgid "Calculating line breaks..."
-msgstr ""
-
#: paper-score.cc:118
#, c-format
msgid "Element count %d (spanners %d) "
msgid "invalid character: `%c'"
msgstr ""
-#: lexer.ll:803 lexer.ll:804
+#: lexer.ll:803
#, c-format
msgid "unknown escaped string: `\\%s'"
msgstr ""
-#: lexer.ll:910 lexer.ll:911
+#: lexer.ll:910
#, c-format
msgid "file too old: %s (oldest supported: %s)"
msgstr ""
-#: lexer.ll:911 lexer.ll:912
+#: lexer.ll:911
msgid "consider updating the input with the convert-ly script"
msgstr ""
-#: lexer.ll:917 lexer.ll:918
+#: lexer.ll:917
#, c-format
msgid "program too old: %s (file requires: %s)"
msgstr ""
msgid "cannot find description for property ~S (~S)"
msgstr ""
-#: flag-styles.scm:81
+#: flag-styles.scm:145
#, scheme-format
msgid "flag stroke `~a' or `~a' not found"
msgstr ""
msgid "Can't fit systems on page -- ignoring between-system-padding"
msgstr ""
-#: layout-page-layout.scm:463
-msgid "Calculating page breaks..."
-msgstr ""
-
#: lily-library.scm:602
#, scheme-format
msgid "unknown unit: ~S"
projects / lilypond.git / commitdiff